JP7366620B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game medium enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and a starting condition is established, multiple types of identification are performed. The interest of gaming is increased by so-called variable display games, in which information is displayed variably on a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as "fluctuating" or "fluctuating display"), and it is determined whether or not to give a predetermined gaming value based on the display result. There are gaming machines with improved In such a gaming machine, when the stopped pattern mode when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game completely stops becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player occurs. For example, a gaming machine that is in a jackpot gaming state opens a special electric accessory called a jackpot or attacker, and continuously provides the player with a state in which it is extremely easy to win a game ball for a certain period of time. do. In such gaming machines, various types of effects are performed to notify the player of the expectation level of being controlled to an advantageous state before the display results of the variable display are derived and displayed.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state, and a preparatory effect that foretells that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. be. For example, Patent Document 1 describes an effect in which arrows for changing the pending display are stocked (displayed) around the pending display.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-131277

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a risk that interest may actually decrease because another performance is executed while the performance that increases expectations is being executed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably maintain interest.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect that causes the predetermined light emitting means to emit light from the variable display executed before the variable display of the target to the variable display of the target based on the determination result of the determination means. And ,
Advantageous suggestion performance execution means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion performance that suggests that the control is in the advantageous state;
Preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed ;
The predetermined suggestion performance execution means includes:
performing a process of turning off the predetermined light emitting means in the variable display of the target for which the determining means has determined not to perform the predetermined suggestion effect;
performing a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light in the variable display of the target for which the determining means has determined to execute the predetermined suggestion effect;
The advantageous suggestion performance includes a first advantageous suggestion performance, a second advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance, and a third advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance and the second advantageous suggestion performance. and,
The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed,
The third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel and independently from each other during the same period,
The third advantageous effect is better when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. Suggestive performances are more likely to be carried out,
The first preparation performance includes a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first performance mode and has a higher expectation level,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode, the first preparation performance is executed in parallel with the third advantageous suggestion performance, rather than when the first preparation performance is executed in the first performance mode. A high percentage of
The third advantageous suggestion performance has a lower degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first advantageous suggestion performance and the second advantageous suggestion performance.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) In order to achieve the above purpose, other gaming machines:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that displays a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, determining means for determining whether or not to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, an effect that executes the process of step 085AKS005) control CPU 120, etc.) and
Based on the determination result of the determining means, the suggesting effect execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes lamp production, etc.);
A light emission mode determining means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008, etc.) that determines a light emission mode of the predetermined light emission means,
A plurality of the predetermined light emitting means are provided, and the order of emitting light varies depending on the light emitting mode determined by the light emitting mode determining means (for example, emitting light in the lighting order determined in step 085AKS008),
The suggestive performance execution means is
In the variable display of a target for which the determining means has determined not to perform the suggestive effect, the predetermined light emitting means may emit light, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target. Perform processing to turn off the predetermined light emitting means (for example, execute the processing in step 085AKS021),
In the variable display of the target for which the determining means has decided to perform the suggestive effect, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target, the predetermined Perform processing to cause the light emitting means to emit light (for example, execute the processing in step 085AKS021, etc.),
moreover,
Advantageous suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that indicates that the control is in the advantageous state;
A preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed;
The advantageous suggestion presentation includes a first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation), a second advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation, the first advantageous suggestion presentation, and including a third advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a chance preview presentation) different from the second advantageous suggestion performance,
The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display preview preparation performance) that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. including a preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance, etc.);
The third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)),
The third advantageous effect is better when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. Suggestive effects are likely to be executed (for example, see Figure 12-10)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent problems with lighting and turning off the lights, and to suppress a decline in gaming interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent only a specific light emitting means from emitting light or not turning off the plurality of predetermined light emitting means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Moreover, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a light emitting mode determining means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008) for determining a light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means,
The plurality of predetermined light emitting means emit light of different colors depending on the light emission mode determined by the light emission mode determining means (for example, emit light with the light emission color determined in step 085AKS008),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem such as not emitting light in a color that corresponds to the performance, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
An effect image is displayed when the predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light, and the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means varies depending on the effect image (for example, a predetermined image of the same color as the emitted light color of a predetermined lamp is displayed in accordance with the emitted light of the predetermined lamp. ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the suggestion effect is not being executed, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light, a process is performed to turn off the predetermined light emitting means (for example, executing the process of step 085AKS021, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined light emitting means, which should originally be turned off, from emitting light and giving the player a sense of unnecessary anticipation.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
When causing some of the predetermined light emitting means of the plurality of predetermined light emitting means to emit light, the predetermined light emitting means to be made to emit light are subjected to a process of being made to emit light regardless of whether or not they are emitting light, and the target to be turned off is performed. Regarding the predetermined light emitting means, a process is performed to turn off the light regardless of whether it is turned off or not (for example, in step 085AKS021, a predetermined lamp to be turned on is turned on, a predetermined lamp to be turned off is turned off, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the predetermined light emitting means can be turned on and off in a light emission mode according to the performance.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
Any one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1, which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value to the player, etc.). a setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process) capable of setting a setting value of
comprising a setting suggestion performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) capable of executing a setting suggestion performance that makes a suggestion regarding the setting value in a predetermined period,
The set values of the plurality of stages include at least a first set value and a second set value that is more disadvantageous than the first set value (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the most advantageous to the player). values up to 6),
The execution mode of the setting suggestion effect includes a first mode in which the rate of selection is high when the setting is set to the first setting value, and a mode in which the rate of selection is high when the setting is set to the second setting value. (For example, in "Aspect 1", the higher the set value is, the higher the rate of determination is, while in "Aspect 2", the higher the set value is, (e.g., the lower the value, the higher the percentage determined),
The setting suggestion effect execution means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, T2>T5, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion performance of the first aspect suggesting an advantageous setting value has been performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to gaming machines described in (7) to (11) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-131277, an advantageous suggestion effect that suggests that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous suggestion effect before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. There was one that was configured to be able to execute a preparatory performance that forewarned the execution. However, in such gaming machines, there is a risk that interest may actually decrease if another effect is executed while the effect that increases expectations is being executed. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the following.

The gaming machine (7) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display) that suggests that the gaming machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state. A means for executing an advantageous suggestion presentation (notice presentation presentation, timer presentation, opportunity notice presentation, etc.), and a preparatory presentation (for example, a pending display) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion presentation will be executed before the advantageous suggestion presentation is executed. and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.), and the advantageous suggestion performance is different from a first advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice performance) and the first advantageous suggestion performance. The preparation performance includes a second advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) and a third advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a chance preview performance) that is different from the first advantageous suggestion performance and the second advantageous suggestion performance, and the preparation performance includes: A first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed (for example, timer preparation). The third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). The third advantageous suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed, rather than when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is executed. (For example, see FIG. 12-10).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above, the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are executed for different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) is completed. , the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 12-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (7) or (8) above, the first advantageous suggestion performance includes multiple types of performance modes (for example, a first performance mode (blue color), a second performance mode (green color), a third performance mode (green color), (red color, etc., see Figure 12-3 (A)), and the first preparation performance is performed using multiple types of performance modes (for example, the first performance mode (small effect), the second performance mode (small effect), etc.). mode (large effect, etc.; see Figure 12-3 (B))), and depending on which production mode the first preparation performance is executed, the first advantageous suggestion that can be executed. The presentation modes of the presentation are different (for example, when the pending display notice preparation presentation in the first presentation mode is executed, the pending display notice presentation presentation is executed in any one of the first to third presentation modes, and the second presentation mode is executed). When the hold display preview preparation performance in the performance mode is executed, the hold display preview performance may be executed in any one of the second to third performance modes.
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(10) In any of the gaming machines described in (7) to (9) above, the advantageous suggestion performance can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation performance (for example, it is possible to execute a pending display notice performance or a timer performance). When this is determined, it may be determined that the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect will not be executed (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), and the incompatible preparation effect may be executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 12-3, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance.) Also, as shown in Figure 12-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect as well. However, it may be determined not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, the pending display notice preparation that does not correspond to the timer effect may be determined. The timer effect may be executed more easily when the effect is executed than when the hold display preview preparation effect is not executed.
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(11) In any of the gaming machines described in (7) to (10) above, the ratio of which performance mode of advantageous suggestion performance is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation performance has been executed (e.g. , when the performance mode of the pending display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance is determined to be the second performance mode, compared to the case where the performance mode is determined to be the first performance mode, it is decided to execute the pending display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance. The ratio is high (see FIGS. 12-3(B) and 12-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the jackpot and the numerical value range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of a big hit and the numerical value range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probability change state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of a big hit and the numerical value range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probability change state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart showing processing within the game control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows random numerical value determination processing at the time of a prize winning. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing in a prefetch notice setting process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a look-ahead chance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart illustrating an example of a non-reach losing stop symbol determination process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a predetermined display determination process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of whether or not a predetermined display is executed and its determination ratio. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the types of predetermined displays and their determination ratios; It is a flowchart which shows an example of final variation effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in a modified example. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in a modified example. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in a modified example. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in a modified example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ending production start setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed and its determination ratio. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an execution mode of setting suggestion performance and its determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ending production operation control processing when there is a setting suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the special figure waiting process. It is a time chart showing the execution period of the ending effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when an ending performance etc. are performed. It is an enlarged view of an image display device of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of composition of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table according to variable display results. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is an explanatory diagram explaining an example of the production control command received on the production control board side, and the processing content performed in command analysis processing according to the received production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the lamp lighting number determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the lighting pattern determination table when the number of reservations is 4. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a lighting pattern determination table when the number of reservations is three. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the lighting pattern determination table when the number of reservations is 2. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a light emission mode. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of lighting/extinguishing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a lamp performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a lamp performance is performed. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C), (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the starting prize receiving command buffer. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of a pre-read preview effect. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure showing the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of setting suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performances to be executed as suggestion performances during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion production has been decided, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the production to be executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. (C) is a diagram showing a performance pattern of a character performance and a timer performance to be performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. (D) is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level of character performance and timer performance and the execution expectation level of setting suggestion performance. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of character performance, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of timer performance, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of each performance pattern of timer performance. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision rate as a suggestion production during the front part variable display of a character production and a timer production in a modification, and the execution expectation level of a setting suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a reservation memory display and an effect image in a modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion performance in the variable display of normal reach, non-shortened non-reach, and shortened non-reach in a modified example. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview performance determination table and a hold display preview preparation performance determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a timer performance determination table and a timer advance notice preparation performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye preview production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pre-read notice execution process. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of a pending display notice performance (preparation performance) and a timer performance (preparation performance). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of a hold display preview preparation performance and a timer preparation performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of opportunity notice setting processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a chance notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of a hold display preview preparation performance and a chance preview performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include an updated display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, a transformation of one or more symbols, and an enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 048AK)
Next, the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIG. 8-1, a pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface. It consists of a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. In addition, the gaming machine frame has a glass door frame with a glass window that can rotate around the left side between a door open position where the front side of the gaming machine frame is opened and a door closed position where the front side is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine frame can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. It is now impossible to open the .

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a first pending storage display area 207SG005D and a second pending storage display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 207SG005D and the second pending memory display area 207SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending memory number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed as a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly hit (left-handed hit) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a game area where the game ball is thrown downward by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, in the left gaming area 207SG002L, a general winning hole 10 is arranged, and in the right gaming area 207SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 207SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 207SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and for changing the jackpot winning probability (ball payout rate), etc. described later in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in the characteristic section 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201.

The board case 207SG201, which has the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, so it is extremely difficult to operate it when the game machine frame is closed. Operation is possible by opening the slot for the gaming machine. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, and therefore can only be operated by the clerk who owns the setting key. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 048AK of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, a single key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 207SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the feature part 048AK of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become. Note that if the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. (The same applies to the following characteristic part 063AK). In addition, the set value is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side as a setting value designation command (the same applies to the following characteristic section 063AK).

FIGS. 8-2(A) to 8-2(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-4 (B), in the second special pattern display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-6(A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-6(B), in the second special pattern display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7(A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7(B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic section 048AK of this embodiment, if the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, if the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, if the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 048AK of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200. 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state relative to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state is adjusted according to each setting value. Different (For example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state.) The magnification of the jackpot probability in the state is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 8-2 (A), Figure 8-3 (A), Figure 8-4 (A), Figure 8-5 (A), Figure 8-6 (A), Figure 8-7 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, Figure 8-2 (B), Figure 8-3 (B), Figure 8-4 (B), Figure 8-5 (B), Figure 8-6 (B), Figure 8-7 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. It is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 048AK of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see that the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, as shown in Figure 8-8. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values to determine a jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, in the first special pattern display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33094, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-9, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the winning judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 048AK of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the set value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the same regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, in the second special pattern display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-11, in the second special figure display result judgment table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the winning judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 048AK of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33421. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the standard regardless of the gaming state and setting value. As such, the judgment value included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and regardless of the gaming state and setting value, the judgment value will be determined as the jackpot judgment value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the numerical range of continuous 1 (common numerical range) based on the value 32767 as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure is different). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to a jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot F). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. That is, the winning of the jackpot and the small jackpot is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-2(A) to 8-7(B) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small hit. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small win means deciding whether to control to a small win gaming state, but stopping the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

In addition, in the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability increases, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player. Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameplay itself does not change. However, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the gameplay may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of changing the probability is set to loop at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is set to a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a certain variable state based on the passing of the jackpot game, while the rate of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different depending on the variable special symbol (so-called V If the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time-saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type). Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small winning probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, when changing the gameplay according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (to control the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 8-12. FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. In the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, as the jackpot type in the first special drawing and the second special drawing, the jackpot in which the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game and the transition to the high accuracy high base state is performed. Jackpot types are set from A to jackpot F (also referred to as probability-variable jackpot). As shown in the figure, in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment, once a jackpot is achieved, 100% probability change control is performed. In addition, for either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time-saving control is executed and the state shifts to a low-probability-high base state, which is a jackpot G (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot). The jackpot type may be set, or the jackpot type of jackpot H in which probability variable control continues until the next jackpot (that is, it does not end depending on the number of times). Further, there may be a type of jackpot in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed four times (so-called 4 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which eight rounds (so-called 8 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player twice (so-called 2 rounds), and the round is repeatedly executed ( This is a so-called “sudden and certain” jackpot). In addition, the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot D" is a normal open jackpot in which a round of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds), The jackpot game state by "Jackpot E" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot F" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player twice (so-called 2 rounds), and the round is repeatedly executed ( This is a so-called “sudden and certain” jackpot).

The high-precision control and time-saving control (variable probability state) that are executed after the end of the jackpot game states "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F" are carried out a predetermined number of times (features of this embodiment) after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of part 048AK, the game ends when the special figure game is executed 100 times, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the special figure game is executed the predetermined number of times. Therefore, if a jackpot occurs again, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, so-called consecutive winnings. state.

For example, when a jackpot occurs, the ratio of so-called sudden jackpots such as jackpot C and jackpot F may be lowered in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, and the ball output rate decreases as the setting value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Bye. In addition to this, the ratio of the jackpot type determined according to the set value may be different, and in this case, the higher the set value is, the higher the ball payout rate is for the player. In this way, in the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment, the rate of determining the type of jackpot when the variable display result is a jackpot is different depending on the set value, so it is possible to improve the game interest.

Next, processing within the game control main processing in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing within the gaming control main processing executed by the CPU 103. For example, in the gaming control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the processing in the gaming control main processing includes setting the stack pointer, setting the built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) ), and initial settings such as setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state are performed.

When the processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated. (Step S1A). Note that, before the process of step S1A, it is sufficient that a process of clearing a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition is performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), set the RAM clear flag (step S2A) and proceed to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), proceed to step S2A. The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether the open sensor is ON (step S4A). If the open sensor is ON, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the gaming machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), check whether the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

If the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a setting value change process (step S6A) is executed to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the process proceeds to step S8A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), execute a setting value confirmation process (step S7A) to confirm the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then proceed to the process of step S8A. move on. Note that if the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or if the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process directly proceeds to step S8A.

The setting value change process is carried out by turning on the lock switch and clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being powered off. This is the process to be performed. The setting value change processing includes a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the production control board 12, a process of updating the contents of address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing a temporary setting value as an actual setting value at address F000 in the RAM 102, and a process of transmitting a setting value change completion notification command to the production control board 12 are performed.

The setting value confirmation process is performed by turning on the lock switch 207SG051 (turning off the clear switch) when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning off the power (power cutoff). This process is performed by doing this. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the performance control board 12, a display of the set value stored at address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor, and A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown), which terminates the display etc. according to the state of the lock switch, and sets it to the production control board 12. A process of transmitting a value confirmation completion notification command is performed.

In addition, in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on, and the first pending display 25A, By starting the blinking of the second hold indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player or a clerk at the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 whether the pachinko game machine 1 is changing the setting value or the setting value is being changed. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round display 1 may be in any manner as long as it does not correspond to any of the jackpots A to F shown. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be lit in different manners at the start of the setting value change process and at the start of the setting value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (to execute the RAM clearing process (step S9A)). (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), proceed to step S10A after executing RAM clear processing (step S9A); if the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), clear the RAM. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). As other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a cold start or restored to the state before the power cut (started with a hot start), depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set or not. ), and performs corresponding processing (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the setting values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) where the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. Processing takes place. In addition, in the RAM clearing process, instead of clearing data other than the set values, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) It is also possible to clear only the gaming information stored in F003 and later of FXXX.

Note that the process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all segments constituting the display monitor over a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be made to blink, or at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor may be made to light up. In addition, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error), or the recovery from a power outage during a setting change, etc. It may also include a process of transmitting an error designation command to the production control board 12 in response to an abnormality in the set value. Furthermore, the first, second, third, and fourth displays that make up the display monitor are used to notify you of the occurrence of a set value abnormality error or recovery from a power outage during setting changes (error notification). Processing may be performed to display "E." in each section. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the gaming hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and from then on, the CPU 103 displays information until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation by a clerk at the game parlor, etc.) The occurrence of the error may be notified by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

According to this, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power outage while changing the set value, an error caused by the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B is detected. Since the occurrence notification is executed, the staff at the game parlor can recognize from both the front and back sides of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the machine has recovered from a power outage while changing the setting value. becomes. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. Become.

FIG. 8-14(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in the process of step S101 in FIG. 5 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 048AK, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not the result) is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and a determination is made as to whether or not the special figure display result is to be controlled to a small winning gaming state as a "small winning". On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes this winning random numerical value judgment process. , determines whether or not it is determined that jackpot symbols and small win symbols are stopped and displayed as a special pattern display result, and determines whether the variable display mode of decorative symbols becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. . As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to win a jackpot or a small win. Before starting, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 or the like starts to execute a pre-read preview performance such as a pending display preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning time random value determination process shown in FIG. The current gaming state is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the variable time state is present when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and determines that the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are both off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that the state is normal.

Following the process of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-14(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, starting opening buffer value, and set value is selected and set (207SGS524). Thereafter, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-16, processing is performed to determine whether the special figure display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 selects a numerical value indicating the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that there will be a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if 207SGS572 determines that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (207SGS572;N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (207SGS574).

If it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if 207SGS574 determines that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no small hit in the variable display (207SGS574;N), it is determined that the variable display will be a miss (207SGS575 ).

Returning to FIG. 8-14 (A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that there will be a jackpot in the variable display at 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and if it is determined that there will be no jackpot (207SGS526; N), in the variable display at 207SGS525. It is checked whether it has been determined that there will be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined that it will be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result will be “miss”. '' (207SGS527a), and determines whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that there will be a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination and the jackpot type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command if it is a jackpot A, a third symbol designation command if it is a jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command if it is a jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command, the fifth symbol designation command if the jackpot is D, the sixth symbol designation command if the jackpot E, and the seventh symbol designation command if the jackpot F (207SGS534 ), and then selects and sets a jackpot variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (207SGS535), and proceeds to 207SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined in 207SGS527 that there will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the 8th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command in response to the variable display result being a "small win" (207SGS531), selects and sets the small winning variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceeds to 207SGS536.

In addition, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the error variation pattern determination table A (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure (207SGS530). Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table D is a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, in this feature section 048AK, in addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, there is also a fluctuation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4. Table B and a variation pattern determination table C for failure, which is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 or more, are prepared in advance. Among the possible ranges of the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, if the setting value 1 is 1, it is 1 to 450, if the setting value is 2, it is 1 to 430, and if the setting value is 3, it is 1 to 450. 410, 1 to 390 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 370 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the setting value is 6.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, among the possible ranges of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, when the set value is 1, it is 1 to 500; 1 to 480 if the setting is 2, 1 to 460 if the setting is 3, 1 to 440 if the setting is 4, 1 to 420 if the setting is 5, 1 to 420 if the setting is 6. 400 are allocated to each.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure and the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take for non-reach fluctuation patterns, is 1 to 550, if the setting value is 2, it is 1 to 530, if the setting value is 3, it is 1 to 510, if the setting value is 4, it is 1 to 490, if the setting value is 5, it is 1 to 470, When the value is 6, numbers 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for losing, out of the range that the random number MR3 for dynamic pattern determination can take, 701 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern regardless of the setting value. There is.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern in 207SGS529 using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, the determination of non-reach and super reach can be made even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination. is always a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so when determining the starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, randomization is performed using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic part 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-14(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach and small win), It is only necessary to provide a random number MR3 and determine whether or not the variable category is determined as such based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, settings are made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the production control board 12 (207SGS537), and then the winning random value determination process is ended. Note that the symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The second special symbol pending storage number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read the second pending storage number count value stored in game control counter setting section 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number in 207SGS541 is other than "0" (207SGS541;N), the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B stores the reservation data as the reservation data corresponding to reservation number "1". , the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, thereby subtracting 1 from the 2nd special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), the process moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined in 207SGS541 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" or not. Determine whether As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number in 207SGS545 is other than "0" (207SGS545;N), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the reservation data as the reservation data corresponding to reservation number "1". , the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (207SGS548), the process moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting section 207SG152 etc. (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the variable time state is present when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and determines that the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are both off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that the state is normal.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the first address of the RAM 102 and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the gaming information stored in the RAM 102 and determines whether or not the determined used setting value is stored (207SGS551). If it is determined that the used setting value is stored (207SGS551:Y), the setting value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is It is determined whether or not the stored determination used setting value is the same (207SGS553).

If the 207SGS553 determines that the specified setting value and the stored judgment used setting value are not the same (207SGS553:N), it sends an error designation command to the production control board 12 according to the abnormality of the setting value. In addition to making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the gaming hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and the loop is completed. Start processing. Since the CPU 103 no longer executes any other processing, the pachinko gaming machine enters a non-playable state (non-playable state) due to the loop processing. Note that the error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment has the setting value referred to when executing the previous variable display (judgment used setting value) and the current value stored at the top address of the RAM 102. If the setting values are different, the management device of the gaming hall can recognize that the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different. The security of Machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state. The CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the firing of game balls, and not discharging prize balls or variable display of special symbols even if a game ball enters each winning slot. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this feature section 048AK, the difference between the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is considered as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the gaming hall. Although a recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may be made to blink, E.'' may be displayed to notify players, game parlor staff, etc. of the abnormality.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this feature section 048AK, if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, an error designation command is sent to the production control board 12 and the game Although the embodiment is exemplified in which each security signal is output only once to the venue management device, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the game-disabled state described above.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this feature section 048AK, if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state. Although the control mode has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko game. Machine 1 does not have to be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, for example, The security signal may be output only to the management device, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be specified again. In addition, when resetting the setting value stored in the first address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used setting value may be stored in the first address of the RAM 102, or the value most disadvantageous to the player (the actual value) may be stored. By setting 1) in the feature section 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from becoming excessively advantageous to the players contrary to the intention of the gaming parlor.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that there is no memory of the determined used setting value, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551:N), or the setting value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used setting value is the same (207SGS553:Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current gaming state, starting opening buffer value and setting value. (207SGS556). Thereafter, the same process as that executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-14(A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 8-16 is performed (207SGS557).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the variable display at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and if it is determined that there will be no jackpot (207SGS558; N), whether or not it has been determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display at 207SGS557. Check (207SGS559).

When it is determined in 207SGS558 that there will be a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the on state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-12(A) and (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F" in the jackpot type determination table are obtained. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, which one of the plurality of jackpot types is to be set as the jackpot type is determined according to the determination ratio shown in the figure (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not will be determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, the jackpot types may be set to "1" to "6" corresponding to "jackpot A" to "jackpot F".

On the other hand, if it is determined in 207SGS559 that there will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to the ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined in 207SGS559 that there will be a small hit in the variable display, that is, if it is a miss in the variable display (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), and whether to control to a small winning gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set) A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of , and furthermore, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" at 207SGS558, for example, if the jackpot type at 207SGS563 is "jackpot A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined as the special symbol. Set to . Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the special figure display result will be set as a "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which becomes a small winning symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in 207SGS565, the setting value specified in 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used setting value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special pattern process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing ends.

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol in 207SGS545 is "0" (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal Finish the process. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, since the determination used setting value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the first variable Although an example is shown in which there is no determination used setting value when displaying, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination used setting value may be cleared by RAM clear processing in the RAM 102. By storing the determined used setting value in the area where the pachinko game machine 1 is not stored, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the settings stored at the top address of the RAM 102 will be used as the determined used setting value when executing the first variable display. It may be possible to compare the values (setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1).

Note that in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a mode is exemplified in which a variable display result is determined using a variable display result determination module that executes a common process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module stores the setting value specified by the CPU 103 (the setting value stored at the first address of the RAM 102) and the determined used setting value. Comparison processing (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 8-15) or control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a gaming stop state if the setting value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the processing and the determined used setting value do not match. (207SGS554 to 207SGS555), etc. may be included. By doing this, even when executing the winning random value determination process, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value, and the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined used value as a result of the process. Since it is possible to execute a process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to a gaming stop state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the processing executed by the production control CPU 120 will be explained.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing (processing within the pre-read notice setting process) performed in the pre-read notice setting process in step S161 of FIG. In the process in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new starting winning command has been received this time (step 048AKS001). If a new start winning command is not received (step 048 AKS001; No), the pre-read notice will not be executed, so the process in the pre-read notice setting process is ended.

If a new starting winning command is received (Step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the pending display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command is "1" (Step 048AKS002), and the new If the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received is "1" (step 048 AKS002; Yes), the process in the pre-read preview setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the pending display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command is not "1" (in the case of "2" to "4") (step 048 AKS002; No), the condition for prohibiting the execution of the pre-read notice is satisfied. (Step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of a pre-read notice, and here, the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command specifies "no judgment". In other words, when there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (check the contents of the start winning command buffer and check the pending display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command) Each winning time stored in the second starting winning command buffer when the previous pending display number's winning determination result designation command or the newly received starting winning command is the first starting winning command. This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command specifying a winning determination result other than "non-reach" (determination result of reach or higher) in the determination result designation command. Note that the execution prohibition condition also holds true when it has already been decided to execute the pre-read chance number in the variable display executed before the target (when the pre-read chance number flag to be described later is in the on state). This makes it possible to prevent players from being confused by preventing pre-reading chances from being executed for a plurality of targets. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is within reach or higher. Note that executing the pre-read chance means to execute a pre-read preview effect by displaying the pre-read chance.

If the condition for prohibiting execution of a pre-read notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the process in the pre-read notice setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the execution prohibition condition for pre-reading notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading opportunity (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-18, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read chance number according to the winning determination result, and the type of the pre-read chance number if executed. In the characteristic unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-18, one of "no execution", "pre-reading chance item A", and "pre-reading chance item B" is determined at the determination ratio shown. In addition, the look-ahead chance is a performance that is executed as a look-ahead notice, and is a variable display of decorative symbols (if multiple variable displays are executed, each of the multiple variable displays) that is executed before the target. As a result, it is an effect that derives and displays a predetermined chance position (a non-reach chance position when a reach is not established in the variable display).

In the feature section 048AK, two types of pre-read chance items are prepared, one of which is a "pre-read chance item A" and the other is a "pre-read chance item B". The target's jackpot expectation level is different between "pre-reading chance number A" and "pre-reading chance number B", and the number of stopping chances is different (as shown in Figure 8-18, in "pre-reading chance number A", the number of "234" The predetermined chance number stops, and in the look-ahead chance number B, the predetermined chance number "345" stops.) In addition, when the chance roll stops, the decorative pattern may be made to emit light. In this case, the "look ahead chance move A" and the "look ahead chance move B" are emitted in different colors so that they can be distinguished. You may also do so. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when "pre-reading chance item B" is executed than "pre-reading chance item A".

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of display results derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance may be made to differ depending on a set value. For example, when forming a look-ahead chance with a combination of odd-numbered decorative patterns such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, the combination of "315" (best) is a look-ahead chance only when the set value is "6". It may also be derived and displayed as an eye. For example, if the setting is low, the percentage of combinations in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are the same number, such as "133", "155", "377", etc., will be derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance. (In addition, regarding the prescribed display described below, the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, so in that case, in order to distinguish between the look-ahead chance and the prescribed display, one of them should be set as the middle symbol. Instead of the right symbol, the left symbol and the middle symbol should be the same number), if the setting is high, the same number such as "135", "357", "379", etc. will be used as a look-ahead chance. It may be arranged such that the ratio of so-called random combinations that do not include numbers is derived and displayed is increased. In other words, the setting value may be suggested based on the type of pre-reading chance that is derived and displayed (the pre-reading chance may include a setting suggestion effect).

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch chance (step 048AKS005). If the prefetch chance is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the process in the prefetch notice setting process is ended. When executing the pre-reading chance item (step 048AKS005; Yes), the pre-reading chance flag indicating that the pre-reading chance item is to be executed is set to the ON state (step 048AKS006), and then the processing in the pre-reading notice setting process is ended. do. Note that the pre-read chance flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

In addition, for example, in order to make it possible for the player to visually recognize which target is the target of the pre-read chance, a pending display notice effect is performed for the pending target of the pre-read chance, and the target of the pre-read chance is displayed. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when executing the pre-read chance, a pending display preview performance may be executed at the same time. Further, a pending display notice may be executed separately from the pre-read chance.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing executed by the feature section 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. ” (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "miss" (step S521; Yes), the specified variation pattern is read, for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "non-reach" (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination includes look-ahead chance, predetermined display, and Which of the following is to be derived and displayed is determined by the non-reach losing stop symbol determination process (step 048AKS010).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the non-reach losing stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 8-19. In the non-reach losing stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 8-20, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read chance flag is set to the on state (step 048AKS011). When the pre-read chance flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the production control CPU 120 selects the type of pre-read chance chance determined in step 048AKS004 of FIG. ” decorative symbol, and if it is the pre-read chance number B, the corresponding decorative symbol “345”) is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the process of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation is the one before the variation that became the target of the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not a change immediately before the target, the process of determining non-reach-loss stop symbols, etc. is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a change immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the lookahead chance flag is cleared to an off state (step 048AKS014), so that the lookahead chance is not derived and displayed in the target change. The process of determining reach loss stop symbols, etc. is completed. For example, if the look-ahead chance is executed only when the target change is greater than the reach (the look-ahead chance is not executed if the target change is a non-reach change), the target The look-ahead chance flag may be cleared to an off state at the end of the variation. In this way, the look-ahead chance is displayed continuously from when the look-ahead chance flag is set to the ON state until the change immediately before the target change. In addition, prepare multiple patterns of variations that display look-ahead chances in advance (for example, if the target variation is the 4th variation and there will be 3 variations to the target, the look-ahead chances will be displayed for the 1st and 3rd times). (a pattern in which a number is displayed, a pattern in which a second and third chance result is displayed), or a pattern in which a second and third opportunity result is displayed, or a pattern in which a second and third chance result is displayed, or a pattern in which a second chance result is displayed, or a pattern in which a second chance result is displayed in advance may be displayed according to the pattern.

When the look-ahead chance flag is in the off state in step 048AKS011 (step 048AKS011; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined display determination process (step 048AKS015). In the feature section 048AK, as a predetermined display, some combinations of decorative symbols among the determined decorative symbols of non-reach combinations are displayed at different ratios depending on the set value, thereby giving a suggestion regarding the set value. Perform setting suggestions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23, a setting suggestion performance is performed by displaying fixed decorative symbols of non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios depending on the setting value. Further, the characteristic section 048AK performs the predetermined display in the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. 8-20. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether probability change control is being performed (step 048AKS041). Whether or not probability change control is in progress may be determined by, for example, reading the EXT data in the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11. If probability change control is not in progress (step 048 AKS041; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if variable probability control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether the previous flag is in the on state (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not a predetermined display was displayed in the variation (previous variation) that was one time before the variation that was the target of whether or not to display the predetermined display. It is provided.

When the previous flag is on, that is, when the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation (step 048 AKS042; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if the previous flag is off (step 048 AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display the predetermined display, that is, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect that displays the predetermined display, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination process is ended. In this manner, the characteristic section 048AK prevents the predetermined display from being displayed continuously by not displaying the predetermined display when the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation. On the other hand, regarding the look-ahead chance, which is a performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot, as mentioned above, it is displayed continuously with multiple fluctuations, so it is difficult to determine whether it is a performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot or whether it is a setting that suggests the setting value. This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive performance or not, and prevents the player from confusing it with a look-ahead chance by consecutively displaying a predetermined display. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which it is determined whether or not a predetermined display was displayed in the previous fluctuation, but for example, the number of consecutive times is counted, and if the number of consecutive times is 2, the predetermined display can be displayed. , the predetermined display may be limited to not be displayed three times. Furthermore, the number of times the predetermined display is displayed consecutively may vary depending on the set value. According to this, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest in the game. Hereinafter, executing a setting suggestion effect by displaying a predetermined display will simply be referred to as executing a predetermined display.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing determination ratios for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined display. As shown in the figure, the feature section 048AK determines whether or not the game is in a so-called consecutive game state (whether or not the consecutive game flag, which will be described later, is on), that is, whether or not it is the first jackpot. Accordingly, the ratio at which it is determined that the predetermined display will be executed differs. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the player is playing consecutive games. According to this, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being executed in a so-called consecutive win state, which makes it easy to guess the set value, and to attract the attention of the player after the first jackpot is completed. Note that even during consecutive games, the predetermined display may be performed at a small rate, such as 2%, for example.

Returning to FIG. 8-20, after executing the process of step 048AKS015, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute a predetermined display, that is, whether or not there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016). If there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the type of predetermined display to be executed according to the setting value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-23 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 8-23 is a diagram showing determination ratios for determining the type of predetermined display to be executed. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic section 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, and for type A, a combination of "344" decorative patterns is derived and displayed, and for type B, a combination of "399" decorative patterns is displayed. A combination of "577" decorative symbols is derived and displayed for type C. Then, it is suggested that the setting is high in the order of type A < type B < type C. In addition, this example shows an example that suggests which setting value is, but for example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is an odd or even number, the lowest setting is "1", etc. The content of the suggestion may be different as long as it is a suggestion related to the set value, such as that it is not a value. Further, there may be a type of predetermined display that is displayed only when the set value is set to a high setting. Note that the high setting may be, for example, the top half of the settings, such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or may be the top two settings, such as 5 and 6. Note that the setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

Returning to FIG. 8-20, after executing the process of step 048AKS017, the production control CPU 120 determines the predetermined display of the type determined in step 048AKS017 (the determined combination of decorative symbols) as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS019), and a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display is incremented by 1 (step 048AKS020), and then the non-reach losing stop symbol determination process is ended. The count value provided according to the type of predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of type A to type C is displayed during the relevant variable probability state (limited to cases where it is not a consecutive winning state). This is to count the number of times it has been displayed. In step 048AKS020, 1 is added to the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 8-24) to be described later, is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-25(f), and is then cleared.

If it is determined in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 8-20 that there is no predetermined display (step 048AKS016; No), the production control CPU 120 displays non-prescribed displays (other than predetermined displays, etc.) other than the predetermined display and the combination of decorative symbols serving as the look-ahead chance. The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left fixed symbol, which is updated by a random counter provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined left fixed symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, among the determined decorative symbols, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right confirmed symbol, which is updated by a random counter provided in the RAM 122, etc., and referring to a predetermined right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Accordingly, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined ornamental symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined ornamental symbol by setting in the right determined ornamental symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Accordingly, a medium determined decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative patterns. In addition, in order to prevent the combination of decorative symbols that constitute the predetermined display and pre-read chance eyes, the decorative symbols that constitute the predetermined display and pre-read chance eyes (predetermined display, etc.) may not be selected from each confirmed symbol determination table. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative symbols is determined, if the combination of decorative symbols matches a predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be performed again. In addition, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, when the probability is not variable state, the same combination of decorative symbols as the predetermined display may be displayed at a lower rate than when the special state is set, regardless of the setting value. It's good to be there.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the production control CPU 120 clears the previous flag to the OFF state (step 048AKS022), and then ends the process of determining non-reach-loss stop symbols, etc. In this way, when the pre-read chance is executed, the pre-read chance is executed with priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance is executed regardless of whether or not it is in a variable probability state, whereas the predetermined display is executed only after the control is in a variable probability state and the first jackpot game state ends (i.e. (It is not executed in a continuous state). Further, while the pre-read chance number is displayed continuously with multiple fluctuations, the predetermined display is not displayed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player during the probability change state, to make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a look-ahead chance or a predetermined display, and to increase interest. Note that even when displaying the look-ahead chance, priority may be given to a predetermined display when the probability is variable. In this case, if the last stopped symbol after the predetermined display is displayed is used as the pre-reading chance, there is a risk that the player will be confused, so if the predetermined display is given priority, the pre-reading chance will be given for the predetermined period. Eye execution may be restricted. Specifically, execution of the pre-reading chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Furthermore, after the predetermined display is displayed five times, the execution of the pre-reading chance may be restricted until the third variation is completed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to the pre-reading chance being displayed consecutively in the predetermined display. In addition, the consecutive winning state becomes a consecutive winning state by once being controlled to a jackpot gaming state and then hitting the jackpot again during the probability change state after the end (the consecutive winning flag is set to the on state). Further, after entering the consecutive winning state, the winning consecutive winnings flag ends after the probability change control is performed a predetermined number of times without becoming a jackpot again (the consecutive winning flag is cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 8-19, if it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of determined ornamental symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined ( Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining left and right determined symbols, which is updated by a random counter provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined left and right determined symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, among the determined decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Decide on the decorative design. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined pattern that is updated by a random counter provided in the RAM 122, etc., and by referring to a predetermined medium-determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. , determines a medium determined decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative patterns. Here, if the determined decorative symbols become a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle determined ornamental symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left determined ornamental symbol and the right determined ornamental symbol, an arbitrary value can be set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the pattern number of the medium-determined decorative pattern so that the determined decorative pattern becomes a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium confirmed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left confirmed decorative pattern and the right confirmed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium confirmed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When it is determined in step S521 that the special pattern display result is not a "loss" (step S521; No), the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "suddenly certain" (Jackpot C or Jackpot F). (step S525). When it is determined that it is a "sudden certainty" or a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a final stop symbol that corresponds to the case of a "sudden certainty" or a "small hit", such as an opening chance, is a final decoration. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, when any of the variable patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the variable pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of the multiple types of open chance items will be determined. Determine the combination of decorative designs. In this case, it is necessary to extract numerical data indicating a random value for determining a chance that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, and to refer to a predetermined chance determining table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Accordingly, the combination of determined ornamental symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined.

After executing any one of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the final variation in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, if probability variation control is performed in 100 variations after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined whether the probability variation control is performed and it is the 100th variation. If it is the final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs final variation performance setting processing (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 8-19. The final variation performance setting process is a process that is performed when the variable probability state ends without becoming a jackpot. In the final variation effect setting process, settings are made to visually display the frequency of the displayed predetermined display for each type to the player, or settings to visually display the number of balls won during a consecutive game to the player. be exposed. In the final variable performance setting process shown in FIG. 8-24, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the consecutive game flag is set to the on state, that is, whether or not the consecutive game is in progress (step 048AKS051).

If the consecutive games are not in progress, that is, if the consecutive games flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the production control CPU 120 sets the settings for displaying each count value provided according to the type of predetermined display (for each type). count value display setting) (step 048AKS052). In step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25(f), settings are made to display the appearance frequencies of types A to C in the form of a bar graph. Next, the performance control CPU 120 clears each count value provided according to the type of predetermined display to 0, and if the flag was on last time, clears it to the off state, and sets the acquired ball count value to 0. After clearing (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 048AKS051 that a consecutive game is being played, that is, if the consecutive game flag is on (step 048AKS051; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of balls played during the consecutive game. The settings for displaying the acquired balls are made (step 048AKS054). Note that the number of balls won during a consecutive game (obtained balls) starts counting when the jackpot game state is controlled, and if there is no consecutive game, it is cleared at step 048AKS053 mentioned above, If so, it is cleared in step 048AKS056, which will be described later. That is, it is only necessary that the balls won in the jackpot game state be continuously counted during the period from when the successive game flag is turned on until it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the performance control CPU 120 clears the consecutive game flag to the off state (step 048AKS055), and shifts to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S525 that it is other than a "sudden hit" or "small hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of final decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by a random counter in the RAM 122, is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. is extracted. By referring to the determination table, etc., it is possible to determine whether the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Decide on the decorative design. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, or jackpot E, a different decorative pattern may be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or if it is determined in step 048AKS031 that it is not the final variation in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031; No), the production control CPU 120 sets other production execution settings. (Step S530). For example, at the start of a variable display or at a predetermined timing during execution, a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a game effect. Immediate notification (definitely A one-shot announcement mode may be performed. Alternatively, as a preview performance during fluctuation, a performance may be executed in which a special performance image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" is displayed.

As another example, in the process of step S530, settings may be made to perform a predetermined type of performance to create excitement, for example, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot". More specifically, it is only necessary to perform a predetermined presentation such as a presentation in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or a presentation in which a predetermined presentation image serving as a mini character is displayed.

Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S531). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S531, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (step S532). Next, settings are made to start changing the decorative patterns and the like on the image display device 5 (step S533). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special symbol variation production control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S532 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. The illustrated example shows an example in which a predetermined display of type A is executed, not during a series of games. Further, it is assumed that the game is in a variable probability state, and the probability variable control is performed until 100 variations are performed after the end of the jackpot game state. Fluctuation begins as shown in FIG. 8-25(a). It is assumed that FIG. 8-25(a) is the 99th variation after the end of the jackpot game state. If it is determined that a predetermined display is to be executed in the variation, and the type is type A, the combination of "344" decorative symbols (determined in step 048AKS018 of FIG. 8-20) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(b). The resulting combination of decorative patterns is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 8-25(c), the 100th fluctuation, that is, the final fluctuation in the variable probability state, is started, and as shown in Figure 8-25(c), the losing symbol (step 048AKS021 in Figure 8-20) is started. The combination of decorative patterns determined by This ends the variable probability state. Note that when the variable probability state ends, a message indicating the end of the final variation is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(e) (message display indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state). Then, as shown in Figure 8-25(f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in Figure 8-24 is displayed (graphed for each type), and the normal state is normal. mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are Regardless of the hit determination value, the range from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), then from 1238, depending on each setting value, The range up to this value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. In other words, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are determined by using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical value range, when determining whether or not it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the value of the random value MR1 is set from 1020 to a non-common numerical range according to each setting value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

In particular, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set at one place within the range of 0 to 65535 with 1020 as the reference value, so there are multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value. Compared to the case where the random value MR1 is a value within the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value (or not), it is not necessary to judge multiple times whether or not the value is within the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value (or not). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, so when determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. is whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and whether the value of the random numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the variable state. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, while the second special figure display result (The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice as many.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to a small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 must be within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the variable special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the small winning gaming state.

As shown in Figures 8-8 to 8-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is determined by the numerical range of the small hit determination value for the pachinko game machine 1, regardless of the setting value set for the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, it is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is controlled or not. When making this determination, it is only necessary to determine whether the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value, and the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the fluctuating special symbol, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning gaming state.

Furthermore, the RAM 102 in the feature section 048AK of this embodiment is capable of storing installation values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 8-15, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 048AK of this embodiment stores information in the RAM 102 every time variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). At the same time as reading out the setting value that has been read out, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read setting value are set (the display result judgment table is set according to the setting value), and the machine enters the jackpot gaming state. Determine whether to control or not. In other words, the CPU 103 reads setting values from the RAM 102 every time variable display is executed, and sets a display result determination table according to the read setting values. This can prevent display results from being judged.

Note that the feature section 048AK of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which setting values are read from the RAM 102 every time variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set in accordance with the read setting values. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read the setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set the display result determination table according to the read setting values. . In addition, when setting the display result determination table according to the setting value read out from the RAM 102 at the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in this way, the setting is performed during the period until a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table that has been created.

In addition, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102 every time variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102, and also compares the read setting values and the previous variable display results. The setting value read out from the RAM 102 for judgment (judgment used setting value) is compared, and if the setting value read out this time from the RAM 102 and the judgment used setting value do not match as a result of the comparison, the image Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent inappropriate variable display results from being determined due to reading of inappropriate setting values. Furthermore, it is not only possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make those around the gaming machine aware that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the staff at the game parlor and the like can quickly deal with abnormal setting values.

Note that although the feature section 048AK of this embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which the setting value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used setting value are compared each time variable display is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value and determined used set value stored in the RAM 102 may be executed based on execution of variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the setting value read from the RAM 102 and the previously used setting value, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used setting value do not match as a result of the comparison, the CPU 103 performs An error designation command is sent to the control board 12, and the production control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on receiving the error designation command from the CPU 103, so that appropriate setting values can be set. By reading the information, it is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16, the CPU 103 uses a variable display result determination module that is common to both when executing the winning random number value determination and when executing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display results are determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when executing these winning random value judgments and when executing the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load on the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the feature section 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, if the variable special symbols are the same, the small win will occur regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set according to the setting value read from the RAM 102). Accordingly, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control the small winning gaming state can be reduced. When setting the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is made common. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-8 to 8-11, if the pachinko game machine 1 is set to 1 (the setting value with the lowest jackpot probability), the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so if 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is necessary to judge whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Therefore, the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a form is exemplified in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a form is exemplified in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic section 048AK, during control in the variable probability state, as a predetermined display, some combinations of decorative symbols among the determined decorative symbols of non-reach combinations are displayed at different ratios depending on the set value. do. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined display, a look-ahead chance number consisting of fixed decorative symbols of non-reach combinations is also displayed as a variable display result, so it is possible to increase variations in performance and improve game interest. Furthermore, the pre-read chance items may also be displayed at different ratios depending on the set values. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest in the game because the variable display result during control in the variable probability state indicates which setting value is set.

In addition, the variable probability state is caused by a predetermined number of times (100) of special figure games being executed after the end of the jackpot game state, or by entering the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. finish. That is, if the jackpot game state does not occur again, the variable probability state continues until at least the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the game is controlled to a variable probability state and returns to a normal state without being controlled to a jackpot game state again, a predetermined display is displayed, thereby preventing a decline in gaming interest.

Further, in the characteristic section 048AK, different types of predetermined displays of types A to C are displayed at different rates depending on the set values that have been set. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK, the determined decorative symbols of the non-reachable combination that constitute the look-ahead chance eye are a combination of symbols different from the determined decorative symbols of the non-reachable combination that constitute the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead performance and the setting suggestion performance, and it is possible to prevent them from being confused with the preview performance of the jackpot expectation level. Further, while the look-ahead chance can be displayed continuously over a plurality of variations, the predetermined display is restricted so that it is not displayed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being displayed in succession and being confused with a pre-read preview exercise.

In addition, the characteristic section 048AK displays the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display at the timing when the state is controlled to the normal state after being controlled to the variable probability state, so that the frequency at which the predetermined display is displayed can be determined by make it recognizable to the public. According to this, the player can check the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed, and can easily predict the set value. In addition, the count value set according to the type of predetermined display is displayed when the consecutive winning flag is off, that is, at the timing when the state returns to the normal state without becoming a jackpot again after being controlled to the variable probability state. only. Therefore, by displaying the count value when playing consecutive games, it is possible to prevent the setting value from becoming easy to guess. On the other hand, when a consecutive game is in progress, instead of displaying the count value set according to the type of predetermined display, the number of balls played during the consecutive game is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. . According to this, the balls acquired during consecutive games are displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic part 048AK)
In the feature section 048AK, as shown in Figures 8-8 to 8-11, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of small hit judgment values) is set to the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example shown in FIGS. 8-26(A) and 8-26(B), the game Regardless of the state or set value, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be provided consecutively.

In addition, if the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are provided consecutively in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in Figure 8-26 (A), if the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set to 1020 to 1237. At the same time, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. In addition, if the setting value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the jackpot judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253. The common numerical value range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. In addition, if the setting value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272. The common numerical value range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. Thereafter, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same way.

When the gaming state is variable probability state, as shown in Figure 8-26(B), if the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346. The common numerical range of the values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has increased from the normal state or time saving state, and is set to 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit determination value) so that it is continuous to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. standard value). In addition, if the setting value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1383. The common numerical value range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. In addition, if the setting value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1429 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1429. The common numerical value range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. Thereafter, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same way.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-27, a form in which the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set consecutively is as shown in Figure 8-27. Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and set the jackpot judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical value range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, set the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and make the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value different according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be varied depending on the set value.

In addition, when setting the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is greater than or equal to the minimum jackpot determination value (in the example shown in Figure 8-27, 64990 for setting value 1, 64974 for setting value 2, and 64954 for setting value 3), and When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, the random value MR1 is further variable by determining whether or not it is greater than or equal to 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the displayed result is a jackpot or a small win. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result can be determined without having to judge whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and whether or not the variable display result will be a small hit. Therefore, the processing load on the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the variable display result can be reduced.

As mentioned above, in Figures 8-26 and 8-27, the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (if 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot judgment value The common numerical range of the common numerical range and the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value, and the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value if 2 to 6 are set as the setting value in pachinko gaming machine 1. The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the standard value for the jackpot determination value, and the numerical range for the small hit determination value is set as a numerical range that is continuous from 1020, which is the standard value for the jackpot determination value, and the numerical range for the small hit determination value is set as a numerical range that is continuous from 1020, which is the reference value for the jackpot determination value. It is set to include the same number of determination values in a continuous range from the numerical value range. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value. It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Furthermore, if it is determined to control to the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the jackpot game is controlled by determining whether the random value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small winning gaming state, the CPU 103 has a processing load for determining whether to control the jackpot gaming state or not, and a processing load for determining whether to control the small winning gaming state. The processing load for performing this can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to a variable probability state, the jackpot judgment value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot judgment value Since the numerical range of the small hit judgment value shifts according to the numerical range of Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control, the processing load by the CPU 103 for determining whether to control to the jackpot gaming state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small winning gaming state are reduced. be able to.

Also, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only has to judge whether to control the jackpot gaming state based on the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 should control the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In addition, in the feature section 048AK of the embodiment, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are successively set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the figure As shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when setting the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in Figures 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the set value of the jackpot judgment value is 6. In a numerical range that is different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the standard value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 8-28, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 8-29, in both cases) The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIG. 8-28 and FIG. 8-29, the standard value of the small hit judgment value is common depending on the variable special figure, while the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the present invention is not limited to this, the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the variable special figure is illustrated. may be the same.

As described above, in the forms shown in Figures 8-28 and 8-29, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value, regardless of the setting value. There is. In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are different numbers. In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60,000 as the standard value (60,000 to 60,016 for setting value 2, 60,000 to 60,035 for setting value 3, 60,000 to 60,109 for setting value 6) is a jackpot. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be varied simply by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the setting value, so the development of the pachinko gaming machine regarding the setting value The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state and determining whether to control to the small winning gaming state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with respect to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, using 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the gaming state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, as with the characteristic part 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether to control the jackpot gaming state based on the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the forms shown in Figures 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value regardless of the setting value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). In other words, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting value, the CPU 103 determines that the same value is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning gaming state using 32767 as the small winning reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether to control to the small winning gaming state.

In addition, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, If 1 is set as the setting value for machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the setting value for pachinko game machine 1, it is set according to each setting value. Although the embodiment of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set. A common numerical range may be set. In addition, even in the case where 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, for example, the standard as in Fig. 8-28 and Fig. 8-29 The range from the value 1238 to the value corresponding to each setting value may be set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and as the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, the jackpot judgment value By expanding the non-common numerical range of , the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state may be varied depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, in the form shown in Figures 8-28 and 8-29, if the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value, although the number of judgment values included differs depending on the variable special figure, so the CPU 103 determines whether the variable special figure is Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning gaming state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1st special drawing and the case of the 2nd special drawing, it is possible to determine whether to control to the small winning gaming state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the application is accepted.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range.

In addition, in the feature section 048AK of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or not. Based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 can change the jackpot gaming state by a method other than that shown in the characteristic section 048AK. It may be determined whether or not to control to a small winning game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and based on the value of the calculation result, it may be determined whether or not to control the game to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and a jackpot game state or a small win game is determined based on whether the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, probability change control is always performed after the end of the jackpot game state, and it is determined whether the special figure game has been completed a predetermined number of times (100 times), or the next jackpot game state has started, etc. Although we have shown an example in which the probability change control continues until any one of the end conditions is satisfied first, for example, the probability change control may be continued until the next jackpot game state starts (a predetermined number of times (100 times)). ) does not have to be the end condition of probability variable control that the special figure game ends). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probable variable jackpot type) that is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is prepared, and a predetermined number of special drawing games will end after the end of the non-probable variable jackpot gaming state. It is sufficient that the associative state ends at the timing when the time-saving control controlled until the end of the time-saving control. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined display may be displayed not only in the variable probability state but also during control in the time saving state.

In addition, in such gaming machines, although the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot gaming state starts, it may take a long period of time for the variable display result to become a jackpot (so-called during consecutive winnings). addicted state). Therefore, for example, when the number of winning game balls in the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player is addicted to consecutive games, and a setting suggestion effect is performed according to the setting value. Good too. Further, a firing sensor may be provided, and when the number of game balls fired exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the game is in a state of being addicted to consecutive games, and a setting suggestion effect may be performed in accordance with the set value. In addition, an out sensor is installed at the out port where game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in, and when the number of out balls exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player is addicted to consecutive games. , a setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the setting value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game interest in the addicted state during so-called consecutive games, and to promote firing. Note that the setting suggestion effect may be, for example, outputting a sound, displaying a specific character, or both, depending on the setting values that have been set.

In addition, in the above embodiment, after a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(e), a predetermined message is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(f). Although an example has been shown in which the count values provided according to the types are displayed in a graph for each type, this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-25(e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed, the player is prompted to operate the push button 31B (for example, a message asking the player to press the button is displayed). or a button image, etc.), a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display may be displayed based on the push sensor 35B detecting the player's action on the push button 31B. good. According to this, the performance can be executed according to the player's preference. Note that if no movement by the player is detected, the count value provided depending on the type of predetermined display may not be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
Next, the characteristic part 063AK of this embodiment will be explained. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 063AK, as well as in the feature section 048AK, once a jackpot has been achieved, 100% probability change control is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. shall be. That is, similarly to the feature section 063AK, it is assumed that the jackpot types "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared as jackpot types. In addition, in the pachinko game machine in feature part 063AK, only time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or both, and the transition to the low probability high base state is performed. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) and a jackpot type of jackpot H in which probability variable control continues until the next jackpot (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. Further, there may be a type of jackpot in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 063AK of the present embodiment, a setting suggestion performance is performed in the ending performance as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state. The setting suggestion performance performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 063AK includes the execution mode of mode 1, which is selected at a high rate when the setting value is set to a value that is advantageous to the player, and There is an execution mode of mode 2 which has a high rate of selection when the set value is set to an unfavorable setting value, and the execution mode of mode 1 has a longer execution period of the setting suggestion effect than the execution mode of mode 2. It has the characteristic of being

These characteristics are due to the following background. Generally, when a performance that notifies an advantage (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on an SNS (Social There is a tendency for videos to be posted on membership-based websites such as Networking Service, Internet video sharing sites, etc. However, if the execution period of the advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, there is no desire to take pictures of effects that are often performed in unfavorable situations (disadvantageous effects), so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effects is long, the problem is that it will actually make players uncomfortable. There is. Therefore, in feature section 063AK, the execution period for advantageous effects is lengthened to secure shooting time, and the execution period for disadvantageous effects is made shorter than the advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. It has the following characteristics. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 063AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the above basic description and the characteristic section 048AK will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect process. In the ending performance process shown in FIG. 9-1, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the ending performance flag is set to the on state (step 063 AKS001). The ending effect flag is a flag indicating that the ending effect is being executed, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The ending effect flag is set to the on state in the process of step 063AKS004, which will be described later, and is cleared to the off state in the process of step 063AKS012.

When the ending effect flag is off (step 063AKS001; No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (step 063AKS002). The ending command is, for example, a command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process of step S117 in FIG. 5, and is a command indicating to start executing the ending effect. If the ending command has not been received (step 063AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect process. Note that the ending command includes the execution period of the ending effect. In the characteristic section 063AK, similar to the characteristic section 048AK, the jackpot types "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F" shown in Figure 8-12 are prepared, but regardless of the jackpot type, the execution of the corresponding ending effect is required. The period is common (for example, 20 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ending command is received (step 063AKS002; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs ending performance start setting processing to start the performance operation that becomes the ending performance (step 063AKS003). Thereafter, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step 063 AKS004), and the ending effect process is ended.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect start setting process executed in step 063AKS003 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect start setting process shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-3 (step 063AKS021). The example shown in Figure 9-3 shows an example in which whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect is determined based on the determination ratio shown in the figure, regardless of the set value, but the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You can do it like this. Specifically, when the setting value is a high setting of 4 to 6, the execution rate may be higher than when the setting value is a low setting of 1 to 3. Conversely, the execution rate may be higher when the setting is low than when the setting is high.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS021, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the setting suggestion performance, that is, whether or not there is execution (step 063AKS022). If it is to be executed (step 063AKS022; Yes), the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the setting value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-4 (step 063AKS023). In the feature section 063AK of this embodiment, there are two types of execution modes of setting suggestion production, "mode 1" and "mode 2".As shown in FIG. 9-4, "mode 1" The higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of determination is. On the other hand, in "Aspect 2", the lower the set value is, the higher the rate of determination is. Here, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" (the higher the ball output rate), so if the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is performed, , it is suggested (an advantageous suggestion is made) that the ball payout rate is set to a high setting value (advantageous setting value). Note that the setting suggestion effects of “Aspect 1” and “Aspect 2” in the feature section 063AK of this embodiment are effects that display characters, but different characters are displayed in “Aspect 1” and “Aspect 2”. (Aspect 1 is character A, aspect 2 is character B, etc.). The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of displaying a character, but may be any form that is different between the "Aspect 1" and the "Aspect 2", such as a message display, a battle effect, a dialogue effect, etc. Note that by determining the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect in step 063AKS023, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is also determined. In the characteristic part 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer when executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than when executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fact that a setting suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous setting value has been performed, and it is also possible to secure shooting time. Furthermore, by being able to secure the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the player on the Internet. It should be noted that the information on which pachinko game machine 1 in which game parlor was taken is often made public. Therefore, from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the players are promoting the gaming parlor. Therefore, by securing the photographing time when a setting suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous setting value is performed, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the gaming parlor side.

Note that the example shown in Figure 9-4 shows that there are two types of execution modes, but in addition to these, for example, when the setting value is a low setting of 1 to 3, it is not executed, and when the setting value is 4. There may be an execution mode of "Aspect 3" that is executed only when the high setting is 6 to 6. Additionally, there may be an execution mode of "Aspect 4" that is executed only when the setting value is 6, which is the highest setting value, and in this case, when the set value is 6, It is only necessary that the determination rate of the "Aspect 4" is lower than the rate at which setting suggestion effects other than the "Aspect 4" are executed. According to this, by increasing the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion performance of "Aspect 4", the player is given the recognition that the setting value is not 6 when a setting suggestion performance other than "Aspect 4" is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being put away, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. Furthermore, there may be a mode in which the process is executed when the set value is an even number, and a mode in which the process is executed when the set value is an odd number.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS023, the performance control CPU 120 performs preparation performance settings for setting the execution of the preparation performance (step 063AKS024). In the characteristic part 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, the predetermined period (as shown in FIG. During the period T1 shown in FIG. 1), a performance prompting the player to prepare for shooting is executed as a preparation performance. Further, the preparation performance is a performance that not only prompts the player to prepare the camera in preparation for shooting, but also indicates to the player the timing to execute the setting suggestion performance (see FIG. 9-9).

After executing the process of step 063AKS024 of FIG. 9-2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the aspect determined in step 063AKS023 is "aspect 1" (step 063AKS025). If it is "mode 1" (step 063AKS063; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs special performance settings for setting the execution of the special performance (step 063AKS026). In the feature section 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, a special effect that is not executed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is further executed. That is, the special performance is a performance performed during the setting suggestion performance of "mode 1". Specifically, the special effect in the feature section 063AK of this embodiment is to display an effect image around the character displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1", as shown in FIG. 9-9(D). It's a performance. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special sound may be output. In this case, the special sound to be outputted may be the same as the sound outputted when the jackpot game state is controlled. According to this, it is suggested that the game is advantageous, and the player can easily understand that the game is advantageous.

After executing the process of step 063AKS026 in FIG. 9-2, the performance control CPU 120 performs extension operation display setting for setting the execution of display performance operation display (step 063AKS027). In the feature section 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion performance of "Aspect 1" is executed, the corresponding operation is performed even after the ending performance (after the end of the jackpot game state) by the player's operation. It is possible to recognize that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed (extended display is possible). Therefore, in step 063AKS027, a display is performed to prompt an operation to make it visible that the setting suggestion performance of "Aspect 1" has been performed even after the ending performance has ended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9(E), a display prompting an operation (extension operation) on the push button 31B is set. In addition, when the extension operation is performed, the characteristic section 063AK displays the character image displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a background image for a period until variable display is performed 15 times (Fig. (See 9-9(I)). According to this, it is possible to enable a player who was unable to take a picture of an image corresponding to the setting suggestion performance of the aspect 1 during the ending performance to take a picture again, and also to allow other players to take a picture again. It is possible to emphasize that the setting suggestion effect of 1 has been executed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS027 in FIG. 9-2, if it is determined in step 063AKS025 that it is "Aspect 2" (step 063AKS025; No), or if it is determined that there is no execution in step 063AKS022 (step 063AKS022: No), the production control CPU 120 performs settings for performing return prevention notification and warning display (step 063AKS028). The return prevention notification set in step 063AKS028 includes a prepaid card, etc. as a recording medium for gaming, on which balance information, etc. is recorded as information that can specify the size of the gaming value of gaming balls etc. that can be used for gaming. There is a return prevention display as a display to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In the return prevention display, for example, an image indicating that the card is being ejected is displayed along with the words "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." Note that this applies not to cards, but to game balls, etc. that can be used for games, and other shapes such as coins as recording media for games on which balance information, etc. is recorded as information that can specify the size of the game value. You may also issue a warning. Note that the prepaid card or the like as the recording medium for the game is used to enable the game to be played by inserting the card or the like. Further, as the warning display, there is an addiction prevention display for preventing the player from becoming too absorbed in playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the slot machine. For example, the addictive prevention display displays the text "Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted to it." and an image surrounding the text. By using such an addictive prevention display as a warning display, the player is restrained or cautioned from becoming addicted to the game, and the player is restrained or cautioned from pouring large sums of money into the game. Other warning signs include a warning sign that prohibits players under the age of 18 from playing, ``Playing by those under 18 years of age is prohibited by law,'' and a warning sign that says ``Cheating is a crime.'' A warning display, a warning display such as "Please be careful of fraud disguised as a strategy" to prevent fraudulent acts, etc. may be displayed using text and images. Note that other warning displays may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko game machine 1, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. This may be a way to be careful not to get injured.

In the characteristic part 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer when executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than when executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. Furthermore, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the type of jackpot. Therefore, in step 063 AKS028, the execution period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is longer when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is executed than when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed. (T3<T6 in FIG. 9-8), and the start timing of the next mode notification, which will be described later, is set at the same timing.

After executing the process of step 063AKS028 in FIG. 9-2, the performance control CPU 120 sets the next mode notification to notify the gaming state after the end of the jackpot as the next mode notification (step 063AKS029), and performs the ending performance. Finish the start setting process. In addition, in the process of step 063AKS029, the period for the next mode notification is also set. In step 063AKS029, the period T4 shown in FIG. 9-8 is set as the next mode notification period. Furthermore, if the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed, the period T7 may also be set as shown in FIG. 9-8(C).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, if it is determined that the ending performance flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS001; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending performance time has elapsed (step 063AKS001; Yes). 063AKS005). When it is determined that the ending performance time has elapsed, that is, when the execution period of the ending performance has ended (step 063AKS005; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the ending performance flag to the off state (step 063AKS012). Then, the number of times the variable display is controlled to be in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is set as the number of variable probability changes (step 063AKS013). In step 063AKS013, 100 is set, for example. Note that the process in step 063AKS013 may not be executed, and a command corresponding to the number of probability fluctuations may be received from the main board 11 side. After executing the process of step 063AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect process flag and initializes its value to "0" (step 063AKS014), and then ends the ending effect process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 063AKS005 that the ending effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect. Determination is made (step 063AKS006). If there is a setting suggestion effect (Step 063AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes an ending effect operation control process when a setting suggestion effect is present (Step 063AKS007), and proceeds to the process of Step 063AKS008. On the other hand, if there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the process proceeds to step 063AKS008 without executing the process of step 063AKS007.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect, which is performed in step 063AKS007 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending performance operation control process when there is a setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 9-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a preparatory performance period (step 063AKS031). The preparation performance period is set by the process of step 063AKS024 in FIG. 9-2. If it is the preparatory performance period (step 063AKS031; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs preparatory performance operation control for executing the preparatory performance (step 063AKS032).

After executing the process of step 063AKS032, or if it is not the preparation performance period (step 063AKS031; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion performance period (step 063AKS033). The setting suggestion presentation period is set in accordance with the execution mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2. If it is not the setting suggestion performance period (step 063 AKS033; No), the performance control CPU 120 directly ends the ending performance operation control process when there is a setting suggestion performance.

If it is the setting suggestion performance period (step 063AKS033; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs setting suggestion performance operation control to execute the setting suggestion performance in the manner determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2 (step 063AKS034). Next, it is determined whether the mode of the executed setting suggestion effect is "Aspect 1" (Step 063AKS035), and if it is "Aspect 1" (Step 063AKS035; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a special presentation period. Determination is made (step 063AKS036). The special performance period may be set in step 063AKS026 of FIG. 9-2. Note that the special performance period in the feature section 063AK in this embodiment is the same period as the execution period of the setting suggestion performance of "Aspect 1". Therefore, if the special effect period is the same period as the setting suggestion effect period, the process of step 063AKS036 is unnecessary. On the other hand, the special performance period may be set to be a period shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion performance of "Aspect 1", and in this case, it may be determined whether or not it is the special performance period in the process of step 063AKS036.

If it is the special performance period (step 063AKS036; Yes), special performance operation control for executing the special performance is performed (step 063AKS037). After executing the process of step 063AKS037, or if it is not the special performance period (step 063AKS036; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038). The extended operation display period is set in step 063AKS027 of FIG. 9-2. If it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038; Yes), extended operation display control is performed to display the extended operation (step 063AKS038A). Then, it is determined whether or not the push sensor 35B detects an operation by the player (step 063AKS039), and if it is detected (step 063AKS039; Yes), the extension flag is set to the on state. After that (step 063 AKS040), the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect is ended. The extension flag is a flag indicating that the player has performed an extension operation, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

If it is determined in step 063AKS035 that the execution mode is "mode 2" (step 036AKS035; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS038 that it is not the extended operation display period (step 063AKS036; No), or in step 063AKS039. If no operation is detected (step 063AKS039; No), the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect is ended.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, after executing the process of step 063AKS00, or if it is determined in step 063AKS006 that there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the return prevention notification and warning period. It is determined whether there is one (Step 063AKS008). The return prevention notification and warning period are set in step 063AKS028 of FIG. 9-2. In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK of this embodiment, the return prevention notification and the alert are performed whether or not the setting suggestion effect is performed in the ending effect. The same applies to the next mode notification.

If it is determined in step 063AKS008 of FIG. 9-1 that it is the return prevention notification and alerting period (step 063AKS008; Yes), return prevention notification and alerting control is performed to execute the return prevention notification and alerting (step 063AKS008; Yes). Step 063AKS009). After performing the process of step 063AKS009, or if it is determined in step 063AKS008 that it is not the return prevention notification and caution period (step 063AKS008; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the next mode notification period. (Step 063AKS010). The next mode notification period is set in step 063AKS029 shown in FIG. 9-2. If it is the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; Yes), next mode notification control for next mode notification is performed (step 063AKS011), and then the ending effect process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the next mode notification period (step 063 AKS010; No), the ending effect process is ended. In addition, the feature section 063AK of this embodiment shows an example in which once a jackpot occurs as described above, 100% probability change control is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Only when this happens, the game will be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and in the case of a non-probable jackpot, if it is controlled to the short time state instead of the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the next time In the mode notification, notification corresponding to each of probability change and time saving may be performed.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing within the variable display start setting process performed in the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the process within the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the extension flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS041). If the extension flag is on (step 063AKS041; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a background image (special background) for 15 changes. 15 variation special background setting is performed to make the image (Step 063AKS042). Specifically, in the process of step 063AKS042, the value of the special background counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set to "1" (initial value is "0"), and a setting is made to display the special background in the variable display. conduct. As a result, the special background will be displayed from the variable display.

After executing the process of step 063AKS042, the production control CPU 120 clears the extension flag (step 063AKS043). Then, the remaining number of display settings are made to display the number of remaining variable displays in which the special background is displayed (step 063AKS044). Specifically, in the characteristic section 063AK of this embodiment, the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background from the end of the jackpot game state until the end of the variable display 15 times. is displayed as a background image. Therefore, in step 063AKS044, 15 scales are displayed to visually indicate to the player that the special background will be displayed until the remaining 15 variable displays are completed. Note that the display does not have to be a scale display, but may be a numerical countdown display. In addition, in this example, the remaining number of times display is updated (reducing the scale) at the end timing of the variable display (the remaining number of times display is updated in the special drawing waiting process described later). The remaining count display may be updated at the same time as the start, and in that case, the remaining count display may be updated in the processing within the variable display start setting process.

After executing the process of step 063AKS044, the production control CPU 120 sets the special background display flag indicating that the special background is being displayed to the on state (step 063AKS045), and performs the process in the variable display start setting process. end. Note that the special background display flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 063AKS041 that the extension flag is in the off state (step 063AKS041; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background display flag is set in the on state (step 063AKS041; No). 063AKS046). If the special background display flag is on (step 063AKS046; Yes), the value of the special background counter is incremented by 1 (step 063AKS047), and then the variable display start setting process ends. On the other hand, if the special background display flag is off (step 063AKS046; No), the normal background display setting is performed to display the normal background instead of the special background (step 063AKS048), and then variable display starts. Terminates the processing within the setting process. Note that once the normal background display setting is performed, the processing within the variable display start setting processing may not be performed until the jackpot gaming state is controlled again.

FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing within the special pattern waiting process executed in the special pattern waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. The processing within the special figure waiting processing mainly includes processing for determining whether or not variable display has been performed 15 times, and processing for updating the remaining number display. In the special figure waiting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special background display flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS051). If the special background displaying flag is in the off state (step 063AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 directly ends the special figure hit waiting process.

On the other hand, when the special background display flag is in the on state (step 063AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 updates the remaining number of times display (step 063AKS052). Specifically, in step 063AKS052, among the 15 scale displays, the scale corresponding to the remaining number of times is turned on, and the variable display that has ended is turned off, thereby updating the remaining number of times display. That is, if it is the first variable display after the end of the jackpot, control is performed to turn off the 15th scale display (the remaining 14 scales are kept lit). After executing the process of step 063AKS052, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the special background counter is 15, that is, whether or not this is the final variable display displaying the special background (step 063AKS053). . When the value of the special background counter is not 15 (step 063AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the processing in the special figure waiting processing.

If the value of the special background counter is 15 (Step 063AKS053; Yes), it is assumed that the final variable display of the special background has been completed, and the special background display flag is cleared (Step 063AKS054), and the value of the special background counter is cleared. After clearing to 0 (step 063AKS055), the waiting process for the special drawing is ended. As a result, a negative determination is made in step 063AKS046 of FIG. 9-6, and the normal background is displayed in step 063AKS048.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing the execution period of the ending effect, etc. Specifically, FIG. 9-8(A) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in the ending effect, and FIG. 9-8(B) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed in the ending effect. This is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 9-8(C) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the ending effect.

The execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the type of jackpot as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect is a common period whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-8, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot symbol stops and a round game is played. Then, when the ending effect is started, when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2, as shown in FIG. 9-8(A) and FIG. 9-8(B), Next, in addition to prompting the player to prepare the camera in preparation for photographing, a preparation performance that suggests to the player the execution timing of the settings suggestion performance is executed during the period T1. On the other hand, if the setting suggestion performance is not performed, the next mode notification is performed for a period of T7, as shown in FIG. 9-8(C).

Next, when executing the setting suggestion effect of Aspect 1 and when executing the setting suggestion effect of Aspect 2, the setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in Figures 9-8(A) and 9-8(B). Execute. In the case of aspect 1, the period setting suggestion effect of T2 is executed, and a special effect is also executed accordingly. Further, an extended operation display is performed within the period T2 during which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8(A), an extended operation display is performed from a predetermined period after the setting suggestion effect is executed until the end of the setting suggestion effect, but within the period T2. If so, it may be any period.

Furthermore, in the case of aspect 2, the period setting suggestion effect of T5 is executed. Specifically, the character of aspect 2 is displayed. Note that in the characteristic portion 063AK, T2>T5. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the end timing of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 shown in FIG. 9-8(B) and the end timing of the next mode notification shown in FIG. 9-8(C) match. Although an example is shown, these timings do not have to match.

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect is completed, if the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, a return prevention notification and a warning display are performed for the period T3, as shown in FIG. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), a return prevention notification and a warning display are performed during the period T6. In the characteristic portion 063AK, T6>T3. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 063AK, the difference (T2-T5) between the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and the execution period of the setting suggestion expression of aspect 2 is set such that T2+T3=T5+T6. Each period is set so that it matches the difference (T6-T3) between the period of return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect is executed and the period of return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed. It is set. In addition, if the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the return prevention notification and warning display are executed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed, as shown in Figure 9-8(C). do. Note that if the setting suggestion effect is not executed, after the next mode notification is executed for the period T7, the same notification (display) is performed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed.

After performing the return prevention notification and the warning display, in either case, the next mode notification is performed for a period of T4, and the ending effect is ended. After the end of the ending performance, that is, after the end of the jackpot game state, the control is in a variable probability state, but if the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 is executed, an extension operation is performed, and the extension flag is in the on state, then the state shown in FIG. As shown in -8(A), the special background will be displayed for 15 variations. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the relationship between the respective execution periods is T4<T3<T1<T6<T5<T2<T7, but is not limited to this, and T4<T3=T1<T6. The relationship may be <T5<T2<T7, and other periods may be arbitrary as long as the relationship T1<T5<T2 is satisfied. In other words, although this example shows an example in which the difference between T2 and T5 is adjusted by T3 and T6, it may also be adjusted including T4, or the period of T4 can be adjusted by adjusting the period of T4 instead of T3 and T6. The difference between T2 and T5 may be adjusted by making them different.

FIG. 9-9 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation when an ending performance or the like is executed. Specifically, an example of performance operation is shown when the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 is executed in the ending performance. Further, the illustrated example shows an example in which an extension operation is performed and a special background is displayed after the jackpot game state ends. First, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the jackpot symbols stop, a round game is then played. Then, as the ending effect starts, as shown in Figure 9-9(B), a camera image is displayed as a preparatory effect to prompt the player to prepare for shooting, and the timing for executing the setting suggestion effect is displayed. , a countdown display is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-9(B) and 9-9(C). In addition, this preparatory effect does not simply display a countdown, but also indicates to the player that they should pay attention to the character by displaying a message such as ``Pay attention to the character in X seconds.'' It's also a performance. That is, the preparatory performance is also a performance that includes an explanation of the contents of the setting suggestion performance. In the illustrated example, the message is simply to pay attention to the character, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect may be explained in more detail, such as, for example, to pay attention to see if character A appears.

When the preparation effect is completed, a setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-9(D). Note that since this is the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1, a special effect is also executed in which an effect is displayed to make the surroundings of the displayed character A stand out. Furthermore, as shown in the figure, when the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 is executed, the characteristic section 063AK displays the display time of the character A corresponding to aspect 1 so as to be visible to the player. In the illustrated example, the display period is made visible by a meter display, but a countdown display may also be used. The display time of the character may be controlled in step 063AKS034 when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, or when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in step 063AKS007. Additionally, processing for controlling the display period may be added separately.

Subsequently, when the extension operation display period begins, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as an extension operation display, as shown in FIG. 9-9(E). Note that in the feature section 063AK, an extension operation display is performed in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the extension is extended by performing the operation. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand what will happen when he/she performs the operation, thereby increasing his/her enjoyment of the game.

When the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected, the extension flag is turned on and the display is extended as shown in FIG. 9-9(F). Visibly display that the background is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 9-9(F), there is also an example of displaying a message such as "Special time has begun!", that is, an example of notifying the next mode, but this is just an example; Mode notification may not be performed. The next mode notification may be executed not only during the execution period T4 shown in FIG. 9-8 but also during other periods, for example, within the execution period of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-9(F) shows an example of this case. Also, in the example shown in Figure 9-9(F), unlike in Figures 9-9(D) and 9-9(E), the character A is in a pose making a V sign. , a pose similar to that shown in FIG. 9-9(D) or FIG. 9-9(E) may be used. For example, as shown in the figure, when the pose of the character changes over time, the pose character at the timing when the push button 31B is operated may be displayed as a special background after the jackpot game state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9, the push button 31B is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 9-9(F), and the character image in the pose is displayed as a special background. Separately from this, even if the pose of the character changes over time, the image of the character camel in the pose displayed at the start of the setting suggestion performance may be displayed as a special background, regardless of the operation timing.

During the return prevention notification and alert display period, as shown in Figure 9-9 (G), a return prevention notification will be displayed with the message ``Please be careful not to forget to remove the card.'' to prevent forgetting to remove the card. image is displayed, and the message ``Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation! Be careful not to get addicted to it.'' is displayed as a warning display. Then, when the next mode notification period begins, the message "Special time has begun!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(H), and then the ending performance ends, and the jackpot game state ends. For example, in addition to the next mode notification, the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 may be displayed. Further, the illustrated example shows an example in which the character image of character A displayed as the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is displayed in conjunction with the return prevention notification and warning display. When the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed, the character image of character B is also displayed, and when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the character image may not be displayed. Note that, different from this, a common character image may be displayed in conjunction with the return prevention notification and the warning display regardless of whether or not the setting suggestion effect has been executed.

After the end of the jackpot game state, the game is controlled to be in a variable probability state. Since the player has performed an extension operation, a special background is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(I) until the variable display is completed 15 times. Although the effect image as a special effect is not displayed and only the character image is displayed, the effect image may also be displayed. In addition, in the feature section 063AK, as shown in Figure 9-9 (I), 15 memory displays are performed as the remaining number of times display, and each time the variable display ends, the memory display turns off one by one. ing. In the illustrated example, a third variable display is being performed after the end of the jackpot game state.

Note that the feature section 063AK in this embodiment corresponds to aspect 1 by displaying a special background in variable display a predetermined number of times (15 times) after the end of the jackpot game state when an operation is performed by the player. Although an example has been shown in which the character display is extended, the special background may be always displayed in the variable display a predetermined number of times (15 times), regardless of the player's operation. According to this, a display suggesting that the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 has been executed, that is, that the ball payout rate is set to a high setting value (advantageous setting value), will be displayed for a long period of time, and other It is possible to appeal to the players of the pachinko game machine 1 and give a sense of superiority to the players of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition to this, when the player performs an operation, the special background may be displayed in the 30th variable display (+15 times) instead of the 15th variable display. In addition, for example, the later the operation timing by the player is, the more times the special background is displayed in the variable display, and the variable display in which the special background is displayed depending on when the operation is performed during the extended operation display period. The number of times may be different. According to this, it is possible to attract players' interest in displaying the special background for a longer period of time. Further, for example, when an operation is performed in accordance with a plurality of specific timings that exist during the extended operation display period, the variable number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Also, depending on the number of times the operation is performed in accordance with the plurality of specific timings, for example, if the operation is performed at the first specific timing among the plurality of specific timings, +10 times, and if the operation is performed at the second specific timing, it is further +10 times. The variable number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Furthermore, the variable display number of times the special background is displayed may be reduced (eg, -1 time, etc.) by an operation at a time other than the specific timing. According to this, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to perform an operation at a specific timing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of mode 1 is determined with a high ratio when the setting value is set to a high value, and the setting suggestion effect is set to a low setting value. As shown in Figure 9-8, among the setting suggestion effects of aspect 2 that have a high proportion of cases, the setting suggestion expression of aspect 1 is executed for a longer period than the setting suggestion expression of aspect 2 (from T5 T2 is also longer). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous has been performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, the characteristic section 063AK executes a setting suggestion effect within the ending effect and displays different characters in the first aspect and the second aspect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous has been performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As shown in Figure 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect in the characteristic part 063AK is the same execution period both when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2. It is. According to this, there is no need to change the execution period of the ending effect depending on the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the control burden on the main board 11 side can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), by extending the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is different from the setting of aspect 2. The difference in execution period when the suggestion effect is executed is adjusted. By extending the execution period of the return prevention notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take out a prepaid card or the like as a gaming recording medium. Further, by extending the period of the addictive prevention display as a warning display, it is possible to reduce the user's addiction to the game.

In the characteristic part 063AK, after starting the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed after a specific period of time, which is the execution period of the preparation effect, has elapsed. Since the setting suggestion performance is executed after the preparatory performance period has elapsed, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of the setting suggestion performance more easily than when the setting suggestion performance is executed in conjunction with the start of the ending performance.

Further, the period of the preparation performance in the feature section 063AK is shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion performance (T1<T5<T2), as shown in FIG. 9-8. Therefore, after the specific period that is the execution period of the preparation effect has elapsed, the setting suggestion effect for a period longer than the specific period is executed. According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, an extended operation display is performed, and when the player performs an operation within the extended operation display period, a special background is displayed in the 15 variable displays that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. , an image of a character corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is displayed. According to this, even after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to know that the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 has been executed.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 063AK, when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, a special effect is also executed. The special performance is a performance that displays an effect image around the character corresponding to aspect 1, and is a performance that is not executed when the setting suggestion performance of aspect 2 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1. In addition, the characteristic section 063AK may output a special sound that is the same sound as the sound that is output when the jackpot game state is controlled as a special performance, and according to this, the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1. It can be easily understood.

(Modified example of characteristic part 063AK)
In the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, modes 1 and 2 are prepared as modes of setting suggestion production, and mode 1 is a mode that is determined at a high rate when set to an advantageous setting value. Although a certain example has been shown, for example, the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 may be a setting suggestion rendering of an aspect in which it is determined that the setting value is set to an advantageous value. In addition, an advantageous setting value refers to a setting value with a high ball output rate as mentioned above, and a setting value where the base value, which is the so-called number of safe balls divided by the number of fired balls multiplied by 100, is 100 or more. (For example, the setting value is 4 or more.) According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 in which it is determined that the setting value is advantageous, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed as an extended operation display (see FIG. 9-9(E)), but in addition to this, the player's operation is enabled. The valid period of operations that can be accepted may be displayed for the player to see. In this case, the operation validity period may be displayed, for example, by a meter or by a countdown. Further, in the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the return prevention notification and the caution display are displayed at the same time, but the return prevention notification and the caution display may be alternately and repeatedly displayed. The first half of the period may be a return prevention notification, and the second half may be a warning display.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, the period of the return prevention notification and warning display is different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is performed or the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is performed. We have shown an example of adjusting the execution period of the ending effect itself (T3 and T6 in Figure 9-8), but in addition to this, it is also possible to adjust the period of the next mode notification (T4 in Figure 9-8). You may also do so. Note that one of the return prevention notification and warning display periods may be set to T6, and the other period may be set to T3.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed by displaying a special background (performing an extended display) in the 15 variable displays performed after the end of the jackpot game state. An example has been shown in which the player is made able to visually confirm that the image has changed, and the player who was unable to take an image corresponding to the setting suggestion presentation in aspect 1 during the ending presentation is allowed to take the image again. is an example. If it is possible for the player to recognize that the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 has been performed after the end of the jackpot game state (captured as an image or video), the aspect of the extended display is not limited to a special background, and for example, , the pending display is set to the character of the mode 1, a special preview effect corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the mode 1 is performed, or the decorative pattern is different from the normal mode and the character of the mode 1 is displayed. may be added. Furthermore, it may be possible to select one of these modes depending on the player's operation timing. According to this, it is possible to extend the display in a manner desired by the player, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, regardless of the timing of the player's operation, it may be possible to select in which manner the extended display is to be performed, or it may be determined by lottery. Further, even if the player performs an operation, it may be possible to select again whether or not to perform the extended display, for example, by operating the cross key or the stick controller 31A.

Further, in the feature section 063AK of the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the setting suggestion effects of aspects 1 and 2 are executed during the ending effect, but this is just an example. If the setting suggestion performance of aspect 1 has a longer execution period than the setting suggestion performance of aspect 2, the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is arbitrary, for example, it may be during a specific round game, It may also be during a variable display such as during a reach effect. If it is to be executed during a round game, it can be set in step S176 of FIG. 7, and if it is to be executed during variable display, it can be set in the process of step S171 of FIG. 7, and it can be executed in the process of step S172. .

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 85AK)
Next, the characteristic part 085AK of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 085AK of the present embodiment, as a pre-read notice performance, from a variable display executed before a variable display of a pre-read target to a variable display of the pre-read target, a predetermined light emitting means is used. By lighting a predetermined lamp, a lamp effect is performed that indicates the expectation of a jackpot. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 085AK, when a lamp effect is executed, in the variable display executed before the variable display to be read ahead, regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light. The present invention is characterized in that it performs a process of causing a predetermined lamp to emit light, and also performs a process of causing a predetermined lamp to emit light regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light even in the variable display of the prefetch target. As a result, even if a problem occurs such as a lamp that is supposed to emit light in a lamp effect, the light emission process is performed for the specified lamp that is to emit light in each variable display, so that problems with the lamp effect can be minimized. This prevents a decline in interest in gaming. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 085AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is an enlarged view of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 085AK. As shown in the figure, a movable accessory 85AK001 is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 085AK, and inside the accessory 80AK001, along with a liquid crystal display device, there is a Three predetermined lamps are provided: a predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1), a predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center, and a predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side. Note that, as shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device is divided into three sections corresponding to respective predetermined lamps. In addition, although the illustrated example shows an example in which a liquid crystal display device is provided in the movable accessory 85AK001, it may be a fixed sub-liquid crystal display device instead of the accessory. The predetermined lamp may be provided in the sub-liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the starting prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( Step S201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), for example, it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 turns the first special symbol on. It is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol which is the stored value of the first special symbol pending memory counter (counter that counts the first special symbol pending memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the first special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. If it is determined in step S202 that the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control buffer setting section, etc.) The starting port buffer value, which is the value, is set to "1" (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that the first starting port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or if it is determined in step S202 that the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting hole switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), for example, it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 turns on the second special symbol. It is determined whether the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 selects a second special symbol, which is a stored value of a second special symbol pending storage number counter (a counter that counts the number of second special symbol pending memories) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the second special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No) or if it is determined that the number of stored second special symbols is at the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103: The starting winning determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending memory count value is added by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending memory count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (gaming control counter setting section, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated by adding 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of a starting prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, a random number for determining the special figure display result is selected from numerical data updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). Numerical data indicating a numerical value MR1, a random numerical value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random numerical value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as pending data by being set at the head of an empty entry in the special figure pending storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage section. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage section. In addition, at this time, when the reservation data is set in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the CPU 103 can control the first reservation display 25A to specify the number of first special symbol reservation memories added by one. The first hold display 25A may display a similar display (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when the reservation data is set in the second special figure reservation storage section, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number that has been added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to do this (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (first special Stores pending data of a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the pattern display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the first starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are stored as pending data, and the number of stored data is stored. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the 1st special figure reservation memory|storage part and the display position of a reservation display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12 side) fundamentally correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display section 5HL. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display section 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (second Stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the second starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. are set as pending data, and the number is It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. A hold that allows you to determine whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot game state based on the (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the 2nd special figure reservation storage part and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display section 5HR. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display section 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared starting opening winning designation command to the production control board 12 (step S211). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (step S213). As mentioned above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the start winning time, and based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, the random number value is determined. This is a process of determining whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small win" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer, initializes its stored value to "0", and then ( Step S215), the starting prize winning determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". (step S216), the process advances to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 10-2 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing is performed so that the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "big hit" or "small win" and is played in a jackpot game. A decision is made as to whether to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random value determination process, the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), and the winning timing is extracted at this timing. The random number value (random number value extracted in the process of step S209) is used to determine whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It determines which fluctuation pattern will occur (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts (before the special symbol game starting conditions are established), the special symbol display result will become a "jackpot" or It is predicted in advance that there will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be changed to a predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. on the performance control board 12 side will suspend the display. Display mode etc. can be determined.

In the winning time random value determination process shown in FIG. ) and the state of the variable probability flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability variable state is present), the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special pattern process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control flag control unit, etc.). Identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it is sufficient to specify that the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is a jackpot game state (step S302). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is being executed in which the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is being performed in the variable probability state or the time saving state (step S303). ). If it is determined that the base is high (step S303; Yes), or if it is determined that the jackpot is hit in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the starting opening buffer value is "2". It is determined whether there is one (step S304). If it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs settings for restricting winning determination (step S306).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or if it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table, the special figure used to determine the special figure display result is determined according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. A diagram display result determination table is selected (step S305).

Following the process of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares each determined value included in the jackpot determining range point by point with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 10-2. It may be determined whether there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start determination) can.

In addition, in the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. In addition, the CPU 103 stores the random number MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special map reservation storage section) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S210, and makes the above judgment based on the stored random number. You may do so. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage section.

If it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of jackpot types will be determined as the jackpot type by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10-6), which will be described later, which has been prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, and sets it as the table to be used (step S309). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value to be compared with the random value MR3.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6, determination ratios are described instead of determination value ranges. In an actual table, a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio shown in FIG. 10-6 may be assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio where 100 is the entire range (1 to 900) of values that the random number MR3 can take. For example, as shown in Figure 10-6(A), when the jackpot type is variable/non-probable, the determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the fluctuation pattern Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the determination value 1 to 45 (5% range) is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB1-1, which is compared with the random value MR3, and the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is assigned the random value MR3. Determined values 46 to 270 (25% range) are assigned to be compared with MR3, and determined values 271 to 900 (70% range) are assigned to fluctuation pattern PB1-3 to be compared with random number MR3. The assignment of such determined values is the same for other tables in which determined ratios are described.

If it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S310). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S305. , it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). is selected and set in the usage table (step S312). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a "small win", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value to be compared with the random value MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table (FIG. 10-6(C), (D)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state identified in step S301 is a non-time-saving state (low base state) (when the time-saving flag is in the off state), the loss fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 10-6(C) is determined. When the table is set as the table to be used and the current gaming state identified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss fluctuation shown in Fig. 10-6 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the table to be used. The loss fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a "loss", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random value MR3.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S209. The variation pattern assigned to the determined value that matches the random value MR3 is determined by referring to either the table, the small winning variation pattern determination table, or the loss variation pattern determination table (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern by, for example, comparing each determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern may be set, and the CPU 103 selects the random value MR3 and the minimum determined value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing the maximum value and the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes in steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a start-up winning command whose content corresponds to the determination result in step S308 or step S313 (step S314), and performs winning random value determination processing. end. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure pending memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting opening buffer value is "1", the starting winning commands are the 1st starting winning opening specification command, the 1st special figure pending storage number specification command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the starting winning commands are the 2nd starting winning opening specification command, the 2nd special figure pending memory number specification command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in command control processing.

The 1st special figure pending memory number designation command and the 2nd special figure pending memory number designation command to be sent are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending memory number and 2nd special figure pending memory number (the number of memory (command including the corresponding EXT data), and the specified special figure pending memory number may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending memory number counter and the second special figure pending memory number counter. The symbol designation command to be sent is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "jackpot" ("jackpot") when the determination result of step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes). When the determination result in step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command (including the corresponding EXT data) that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "small hit" (" A command that includes EXT data corresponding to "Small hit", and when the determination result of step S310 is outside the small hit determination range (Step S310; No), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "Lose". (command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S303 is the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), "no determination" is made, which means that no determination has been made at the time of starting winning. It is sufficient to use a command that specifies that it is (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no determination"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be sent is a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that will be the determination result when the fluctuation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result); If the determination result in step S304 is the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), a command that specifies that there is no determination at the time of starting winning (EXT corresponding to "no determination") (command containing data).

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small win". It is determined whether or not there will be a "win" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-6), and so-called pre-reading is performed. In addition, in this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but there is a certain degree of accuracy. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the winning time random number determination process, based on whether it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of step S302 or that the time saving control is being performed in the process of step S303, the start is started by the process of step S304. It is determined whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S314 without executing the processing such as step S305, and no determination is made at the time of starting winning. In this way, when the high opening control associated with the time saving control is performed or when the jackpot game state is in effect, each of the above-mentioned points is determined based on the occurrence of a starting prize (first starting winning) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening. Restrict judgment so that it does not occur. As a result, when the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, when the time saving control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in progress, the first starting prize is It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the prefetching based on the above from being executed.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot in which the special symbol display result becomes "jackpot" (step S262). When determining that the jackpot flag is in the off state in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is in the on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result becomes "small win" (step S264). On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a loss in which the special figure display result becomes "loss" according to the number of pending memories. (Step S265).

FIG. 10-5 shows a specific example of the variation pattern in this embodiment.

Variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is a "lose", and specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become a reach mode), and the special figure variation time is different from the normal one. This is a non-reach variation pattern in length. This variation pattern is selected when the number of pending memories is less than 2.

Variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is a "lose", and specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become a reach mode), and the special figure variation time is longer than usual. is also a short (shortening fluctuation) non-reach fluctuation pattern. This variation pattern is selected when the number of pending memories is two or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is a "lose", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of a normal reach. Variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is a "lose", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of super reach A. Variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is a "lose", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of super reach B.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of a normal reach. Variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of super reach A. Variation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of super reach B.

Variable pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the jackpot type is "Suddenly certain", and when the variable display result is "Small hit", and specifies non-reach. This is a non-reach variation pattern. Variable pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the jackpot type is "Small hit", and when the variable display result is "Small hit", and is exclusively for sudden/small hit. This is a reach variation pattern that specifies reach execution. Here, the special reach for certain/small hit is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a certain sudden jackpot or small hit. The decorative pattern for the sudden jackpot is a pattern in which the combinations of left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as "3", "5", and "7". Moreover, the decorative pattern for small winning is a pattern in which the combinations of left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as "2", "4", and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, a jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. be done. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation, and determines the fluctuation assigned to the determined value that matches the random number MR3. What is necessary is to determine (select) the pattern as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 10-6(A), a determination ratio is written instead of a determination value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is determined. As an example, in the small winning variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation, and assigns the determined value that matches the random number MR3. The fluctuation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 10-6(B), a determination ratio is written instead of a determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A variation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is a non-time saving state (the time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(C). When the gaming state is a time saving state (time saving flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(D). As an example, in each losing variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the losing fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation, and determines the fluctuation assigned to the determined value that matches the random number MR3. What is necessary is to determine (select) the pattern as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIGS. 10-6(C) and (D), a determination ratio is written instead of a determination value.

As shown in Figure 10-6, at the time of jackpot (probable variable/non-probable variable), the decision ratio of variation pattern PB1-3 to execute super reach B is highest, and variation pattern PB1-2 of super reach A, normal reach The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. At the time of loss, the determination rate of non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, and super reach B variation pattern. The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of fluctuation patterns PA2-3. From this, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at the highest rate. Then, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" (so-called jackpot expectation level) decreases in the order of super reach A and normal reach. That is, the variable display that performs a super reach effect has a higher rate of variable display results that result in a "jackpot" than the variable display that does not perform a reach effect. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time) is, the higher the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, at the time of a jackpot (suddenly certain), the determination ratio of the sudden/small hit reach variation pattern PC1-2 is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of a small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden/small hit reach variation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of sudden/small hit reach is executed, the variable display result is likely to be "jackpot (sudden certainty)", and when the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is executed, Variable display results tend to be "small hits".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time) that is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the special symbol starts changing in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. It is. The special figure variation time is predetermined in correspondence with a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance, as shown in FIG. 10-5. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols are derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and S265. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, one of the special symbol games using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that one of the special symbol games for which the conditions are met is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display a display that can specify the first special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It is also possible to have the hold display 25A perform this (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It may be possible to have the hold display 25B do this (for example, reduce the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 sends a command at the start of the variation of the special symbol (command at the start of variation) in order to notify the production control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc. Transmission settings are performed (step S268). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), display result specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command ( Sequentially send a command containing the first special figure pending memory number count value decremented by 1, that is, EXT data indicating the first special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game. Configure sending settings to On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 Sequentially transmits the reduced count value of the second special figure pending memory number (in other words, a command containing EXT data indicating the second special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure sending settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the fluctuation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the feature section 085AK in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 receives starting winning commands from the main board 11 (starting winning opening designation command, special figure pending storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether there is one (step S401).

If it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When receiving the 1st starting prize opening designation command or the 1st special figure pending memory number designation command as the starting winning command, the starting winning command (1st starting winning opening designation command, 1st special figure pending memory number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a 2nd starting prize opening designation command or a 2nd special figure pending memory number designation command is received as a starting winning command, the starting winning command (2nd starting winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure pending storage number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second starting winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of first start winning. The first start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first starting winning. The first starting winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, in the first start winning command buffer in the feature section 085AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, there is an area where various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as the pending display number "0". (The same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning hole, four commands: 1st starting winning hole designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 1st start winning opening designation command, 1st special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 1st start winning command buffer stores other information for each hold. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the storage information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the empty area of the first starting winning command buffer in accordance with the reception order. The data in the free area of the command buffer at the time of first start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a first starting winning opening designation command, a first special figure reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

Further, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing lighting patterns to be described later, as a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers. The lighting pattern is a pattern indicating at what timing a predetermined lamp is caused to emit light. The lighting patterns corresponding to the hold display numbers “0” to “4” in the example shown in FIG. 10-8(A) include “PT4-3-01”, “0”, “0”, “0”, "0" is stored. "PT4-3-01" is a lighting pattern determined when the number of pending memories (number of pending) is "4", as will be described later, and is a lighting pattern determined when the number of pending memories (number of pending) is "4". This is a pattern in which three predetermined lamps are made to emit light in three times. Note that when the lighting pattern is "0", no lighting pattern is set and the lamp effect is not executed. Although not shown, the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-8(A) includes an area for storing information indicating which light emission mode (see FIG. 10-15). is also provided (same as the second starting winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-8(B)).

Moreover, FIG. 10-8(B) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. The second starting winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the starting winning receiving command received at the second starting winning. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, similar to the first starting winning command buffer, the second starting winning command buffer in the feature section 085AK in this embodiment has a pending display number "0" as a variable display during execution. An area is provided in which various types of corresponding command data are stored.

When there is a starting prize in the second starting winning hole, the following four commands: 2nd starting winning hole designation command, 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 2nd start winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 2nd start winning command buffer stores other information for each hold. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the storage information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the empty area of the second starting winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The data in the empty area of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each production control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a second starting winning opening designation command, a first special symbol reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the second starting winning command buffer, like the first starting winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers, and displays the display step change pattern described later. A storage area is provided for storing. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(B) shows an example in which no production control command data is stored in any of the storage areas of pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-7, after executing step S402, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the production control CPU 120 , it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received gaming state designation command. (Step S404).

The high accuracy flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the probability change state, and is set in the high probability change flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. The high base flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is set in the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability high base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and the time saving flag are in the ON state), the performance control CPU 120 selects the high probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter, the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command specifies a high-accuracy, low-base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high-accuracy flag is turned on, and the high base is Turn the flag off. If the gaming state specification command specifies a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and time-saving flag are in the off state), both the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag are set. Turn off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the production control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and command analysis processing. end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10-9, the processing executed in response to reception of each production control command in the command analysis processing will be described. The content shown in the "Processing Content" item shown in FIG. 10-9 is, for example, the process executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the "Processing Content" item indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 10-7, and means that the corresponding step process is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the "Processing Content" item are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Furthermore, setting the reception flag means turning it on.

For example, if the received effect control command is a variable pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets a variable pattern command reception flag.

For example, if the received effect control command is a display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in a display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. When the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-10 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step 085AKS001). If it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step 085 AKS001; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the received starting winning command is the first pending memory number addition designation command received in the low base state or the high It is determined whether the command is one of the second pending storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 085AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step 085AKS002, in a low base state, a pre-read preview effect (lamp effect) can be executed when the number of pending memories increases based on a winning in the first starting winning hole. Therefore, in the high base state, when the number of pending memories increases based on winnings in the second starting prize opening, a pre-read preview performance (lamp performance) becomes executable. In addition, in the high base state, the accessory 85AK001 may be moved from the position shown in FIG. 10-1 to the upper part (above the image display device 5) to perform a different effect from the lamp effect. That is, execution of the lamp effect may be restricted in the high base state. Then, when the low base state is reached, the accessory 85AK001 may be returned to the position shown in FIG. 10-1 again to enable the execution of the lamp effect.

If it is determined that it is either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 085 AKS002; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of pending memories corresponding to the winning start winning hole is 2 or more (step 085AKS003). If the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 085AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the lamp effect flag indicating that the lamp effect is being executed is set to the on state (step 085AKS004). The lamp effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and after being set to the on state in step 085AKS009, which will be described later, it is cleared to the off state when the lamp effect ends (step 085AKS034, which will be described later). In the characteristic section 085AK of this embodiment, execution of the lamp effect is started when the lamp effect flag is set to the on state, and execution of the lamp effect is started when the lamp effect flag is cleared to the off state. It is said to have ended.

When the lamp effect is not being executed, that is, when the lamp effect flag is in the off state (step 085AKS), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the lamp effect is being executed, the lamp point, and the number of lamps lit as shown in FIG. 10-11. A decision is made in accordance with the variable display result by referring to the number decision table and in accordance with the decision ratio. Note that the number of lamps to be lit is determined by the number of lamps to be lit among the three predetermined lamps: the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left, the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center, and the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right. I'm talking about numbers. Note that the performance control CPU 120 may obtain the variable display result and the variable pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command.

The lamp lighting number determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not to execute a lamp effect and to determine the number of predetermined lamps to be emitted when the lamp effect is executed. As shown in Figure 10-11, the lamp lighting number determination table is for each variable display result (including jackpot type and fluctuation pattern): "No execution", which does not execute the lamp effect, and "Lighting", which indicates that the lamp effect is executed. A determination ratio is assigned to each of the numbers "1" to "3". More specifically, the variable display results are classified into "big hit", "loss (super reach)/small hit", "other than the above", and "no execution", "one", "two", " A different determination ratio is assigned to each of the three. As shown in the figure, in the feature section 085AK, the determination ratio is assigned such that the greater the number of lamps that emit light in the lamp performance (the greater the number of lit lamps), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Further, in the illustrated example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", a determination ratio is not assigned for the number of lights on "one". Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the number of lights on will be "two" or more. In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", if the determination ratio is assigned so that the higher the number of lamps that emit light (the greater the number of lamps lit), the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the number of lights lit will increase. A determination ratio may also be assigned to "one" (it does not have to be "0").

Returning to FIG. 10-10, after executing the process of step 085AKS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it was decided to execute the lamp effect in step 085AKS005 (step 085AKS006). When it is determined to execute the lamp effect (step 085AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of lamp lighting determined in step 085AKS005 and the first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second special figure pending memory number designation command. A lighting pattern is determined in accordance with the number of reserved memories indicated in either of them (step 085AKS007). In addition, the number of reserved memory is the 1st special figure pending memory number specification command when the 1st starting prize opening designation command is received, and the 2nd special figure holding memory number specification command when the 2nd starting winning opening specification command is received. It can be specified by referring to the pending storage number specification command. In the process of step 085AKS007, a lighting pattern is determined with reference to the lighting pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14. The lighting pattern is a pattern that determines the timing at which the lamp to be emitted is lit. The lighting pattern determined in step 085AKS007 is the lighting pattern in the command buffer at the time of first start prize winning shown in Figure 10-8(A) or in the command buffer at the time of second start prize winning shown in Figure 10-8(B). is stored in the storage area. Note that by determining the lighting pattern, the timing to turn on the predetermined lamp and the timing to turn off the predetermined lamp are determined as the lamp performance period.

As described above, the lighting pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are referred to in order to determine the lighting pattern that indicates at what timing a predetermined lamp that is to be emitted in a lamp effect is to be lit. This is a table that The lighting pattern determination table is divided according to the number of holds (the hold display number of the hold memory that is the preview target of the hold preview performance) and the number of lamps lit. Specifically, the lighting pattern determination table is divided according to the number of pending lamps, ``4'' to ``2,'' and the number of predetermined lamps lit, such as ``1'' to ``3.'' In addition, in each lighting pattern determination table divided by the number of reservations and the number of lighting of a predetermined lamp, the lighting of a predetermined lamp is displayed for each variable display result such as "Jackpot", "Lose (Super Reach)/Small Hit", and "Other". Different determination ratios are assigned to lighting patterns set according to the number of lighting patterns. In addition, in the characteristic part 085AK, the timing for emitting light of a predetermined lamp is "at the time of winning" which indicates when a winning that is the object (target) of the look-ahead notice has occurred, and "during target variation" which indicates the time when the target is variablely displayed. and during multiple fluctuations from "at the time of prize winning" to "target fluctuation" (varies depending on the number of pending memories). For example, the timing of "during the first fluctuation" refers to the first variable display performed after the target won a prize, that is, the variable display performed after the pending display was shifted once. , does not include the variable display when winning a prize.

Figures 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) show when the number of pending memories (number of pending) is "4" (when the pending memory for the preview target of the lamp effect is pending display number "4") This is a referenced lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-12(A) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is three (number of lit lamps: 3). As shown in Figure 10-12 (A), the number of pending memories is "4" and the number of lights lit is "3", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at three timings: ”, “during third variation”, and “during target variation” (not shown). There are also patterns). As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 085AK, the determination ratio is assigned so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the determined number of lights is lit at an earlier timing than when the lighting is at a later timing. (Same below). In addition, on the contrary, it may be set so that the jackpot expectation level is higher when the determined number of lights are turned on at a later timing than when the lights are turned on at an earlier timing. Furthermore, although the illustrated example shows an example in which one predetermined lamp is lit at one timing, there may be a lighting pattern (for example, FIG. 10-14) in which a plurality of predetermined lamps are lit at one timing. Good (the same applies hereafter). According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the timing at which the predetermined lamp lights up.

FIG. 10-12(B) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is two (number of lit lamps: 2). As shown in Figure 10-12 (B), the number of pending memories is "4" and the number of lights lit is "2", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at two of the following timings: '', ``3rd variation in progress'', and ``target variation in progress'' (not shown). There are also patterns).

FIG. 10-12(C) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is one (number of lit lamps: 1). As shown in Figure 10-12 (C), the number of pending memories is "4" and the number of lights lit is "1", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". ”, “Third variation in progress”, and “Target variation in progress”, the lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at any one of the following timings (not shown). There is also a pattern of

Figures 10-13 (A) to 10-13 (C) are shown when the number of pending memories (number of pending memories) is "3" (when the pending memory for the preview target of the lamp effect has the pending display number "3") This is a referenced lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is three (number of lit lamps: 3). As shown in Figure 10-13 (A), the number of pending memories is "3" and the number of lights lit is "3", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". A lighting pattern is set so that a predetermined lamp is lit one by one at three timings among the timings of "" and "Target is changing" (some patterns are omitted from illustration).

FIG. 10-13(B) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is two (number of lit lamps: 2). As shown in Figure 10-13 (B), the number of pending memories is "3" and the number of lights lit is "2", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". A lighting pattern is set so that a predetermined lamp is lit one by one at two of the timings of "" and "Target is changing" (some patterns are omitted from illustration).

FIG. 10-13(C) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of lit lamps is one (number of lit lamps: 1). As shown in Figure 10-13 (C), the number of pending memories is "4" and the number of lights lit is "1", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the second change". A lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at one of the timings of "" and "Target is changing" (some patterns are omitted from illustration).

Figures 10-14 (A) to 10-14 (C) show when the number of pending memories (number of pending) is "2" (when the pending memory for the preview target of the lamp effect is pending display number "2") This is a referenced lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-14(A) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is three (number of lit lamps: 3). As shown in Figure 10-14 (A), the number of pending memories is "2" and the number of lights lit is "3", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the target change" A lighting pattern in which a predetermined lamp is lit one by one at three timings, and a pattern in which one and two lamps are lit at two of these three timings (one lamp is lit first). There may be a pattern, or a pattern where two lights are lit first), and a pattern where three lights are lit at any one of these three timings (not shown). There is also a pattern of In addition, in the illustrated example, the decision ratio is assigned so that the jackpot expectation is higher for a pattern in which the lights are lit one by one than in a pattern in which three lights are lit at once, but this is different from this. On the contrary, the determination ratio may be assigned so that the pattern in which three lights are lit at once has a higher jackpot expectation. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

FIG. 10-14(B) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of predetermined lamps lit is two (number of lit lamps: 2). As shown in Figure 10-13 (B), the number of pending memories is "2" and the number of lights lit is "2", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the target change" A lighting pattern in which one predetermined lamp is lit at two of the respective timings, and a lighting pattern in which two predetermined lamps are lit at any one timing are set (not shown). There are also patterns). The illustrated example shows an example in which the decision ratio is assigned so that a pattern in which lights are lit one by one has a higher jackpot expectation than a pattern in which two lights are lit at once, but this is the opposite. Alternatively, a determination ratio may be assigned so that the pattern in which two lights are lit at once has a higher jackpot expectation. Furthermore, when two lights are turned on at once, a determination ratio may be assigned such that the later the lights are turned on, the higher the jackpot expectation. According to this, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 10-13(C) is a lighting pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of lighting of a predetermined lamp is one (number of lighting: 1). As shown in Figure 10-13 (C), the number of pending memories is "2" and the number of lights is "1", so "at the time of winning", "during the first change", "during the target change" A lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at any one of the respective timings (some patterns are not shown).

It should be noted that among the lighting timings of the lighting patterns in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the timing "at the time of winning" may be any timing when the game medium enters the starting winning hole and the hold display is performed. In addition, among the lighting timings of the lighting patterns in Figures 10-12 to 10-14, the timings of "during 1st variation" to "during 3rd variation" and the timing of "during target variation" are determined by each variable. Depending on the variation pattern corresponding to the display, one of the multiple timings during the variable display may be determined by lottery. Note that the timing may be a predetermined timing (for example, the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation). In the characteristic part 085AK in this embodiment, the lighting pattern is determined in the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. Regarding the timing of "Medium", one of the timings in the variable display is determined according to the variation pattern corresponding to each variable display.

After determining the lighting pattern in step 085AKS007 shown in FIG. 3), a light emission mode indicating in which order and in which color the three predetermined lamps are to be emitted is determined (step 085AKS008). Specifically, in step 085AKS008, the light emitting mode is determined as either "mode A" or "mode B" according to the variable display result according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 10-15. As shown in the figure, "mode A" is a light emission mode in which the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side, and the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center emit light in this order. , "Aspect B" is a light emission mode in which the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side, the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, and the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center emit light in this order. In the illustrated example, the light emission mode of "Aspect A" has a higher jackpot expectation than the light emission mode of "Aspect B." According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode, such as the order in which the plurality of predetermined lamps emit light. Note that the determination ratio may be assigned so that the jackpot expectation is higher in "Aspect B" than in "Aspect A." In addition, if the number of lit lamps is "3", the third lamp in the lighting order shown in the figure will be lit (light will be emitted), and if the number of lighting lamps is "2", the second lamp in the lighting order shown will be lit. (to emit light), and when the number of lights on is "1", it is sufficient to light up to the first in the lighting order shown in the figure (it is sufficient to cause light to emit light).

In addition, in the characteristic part 085AK, as shown in the figure, when the third lamp is lit, the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) is the last one in both "mode A" and "mode B". It is set to light up. Further, in the characteristic section 085AK, a predetermined image is displayed on the corresponding liquid crystal display device in accordance with the lighting of each predetermined lamp. Specifically, a predetermined image of the same color as that of the predetermined lamp is displayed, such as displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 1 in accordance with the emission of the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side. An image is displayed in synchronization with the light emission of a predetermined lamp. According to this, the performance effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 085AK, in addition to the lighting order being different between "aspect A" and "aspect B", the emitted light color is set to be different even if the predetermined lamp is the same, and the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 is lit last. Only (lamp 2) has a common emission color. Specifically, in the case of the light emission mode of "Aspect A", after the lamp 1 emits "blue" light, the lamp 3 emits "green" light, and finally the lamp 2 emits "red" light (the liquid crystal of the mode The same applies to the color of the predetermined image displayed on the display device). On the other hand, in the case of the light emission mode of "Aspect B", after the lamp 3 emits light in "yellow", the lamp 1 is caused to emit light in "orange", and finally the lamp 2 is caused to emit light in "red" (the liquid crystal display The same applies to the color of a predetermined image displayed on the device). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention not only to the lighting order but also to the emitted light color. In step 085AKS008 of FIG. 10-10, the emitted light color of the predetermined lamp and the lighting order (the order in which the light is emitted) are determined. Note that in the characteristic part 085AK in this embodiment, three predetermined lamps such as the left predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1), the center predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), and the right predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) are turned on. Although an example is shown in which the order and emitted light color are different, the number of predetermined lamps is not limited to three, and more such as five may be provided, and the lighting order and emitted color of each lamp may be different. Further, the number of predetermined lamps may be one, and the lighting timing and emitted light color may be different. Furthermore, although the light emission mode of the characteristic part 085AK in this embodiment shows an example in which there are two light emission modes with different emission colors, there are other light emission modes in which a predetermined lamp blinks, and a light emission mode in which the speed of blinking is different. A plurality of different light emission modes may be included. In addition, in the characteristic part 085AK in this embodiment, whether it is the light emission mode of "mode A" or the light emission mode of "mode B", the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center is placed last. Although an example of emitting light has been shown, there may be a light emitting mode in which the predetermined lamp to be emitted last is not the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), that is, a light emitting mode that deviates from the rules. In this case, in the case of a light emission mode that deviates from the rule, it is sufficient that the jackpot expectation level is higher than other light emission modes. Further, although the predetermined lamp to be emitted last is the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), there may be a light emission mode other than "red" (for example, "rainbow color"). In this case as well, it is sufficient that the jackpot expectation level is higher than in other light emission modes.

After determining the light emission mode in step 085AKS008 shown in FIG. 10-10, the effect control CPU 120 sets the lamp effect flag to the on state (step 085AKS009).

After executing the process in step 085AKS009, it was determined in step 085AKS002 that it was neither the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state nor the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state. (Step 085AKS002; No), If the number of pending memories is less than 2 in Step 085AKS003 (Step 085AKS003; No), If it is determined that the lamp effect flag is on in Step 085AKS004 (Step 085AKS004; Yes), Alternatively, if it is determined in step 085AKS006 not to perform the lamp effect (step 085AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first suspension display or the second suspension display (step 085AKS010). In addition, in the process of step 085AKS010, if the lighting pattern determined in step 085AKS007 is a lighting pattern that causes a predetermined lamp to emit light at the timing of "at the time of winning", the predetermined lamp to be emitted is emitted in accordance with the pending display. Perform the processing to

After executing the process of step 085AKS010, or if it is determined in step 085AKS001 that the start winning command has not been received (step 085AKS001; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation start designation command has been received. (Step 085AKS011). The production control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation start designation command has been received by, for example, referring to whether the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set. All you have to do is decide. If it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has not been received (step 085 AKS011; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the prefetch notice setting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has been received (step 085AKS011; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the received fluctuation designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command (step 085AKS012). . If it is determined that the received fluctuation start designation command is not the second fluctuation start designation command, that is, the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command (step 085 AKS012; No), the production control CPU 120, The display positions of the first hold displays corresponding to "2" to "4" are moved (shifted) to the right one by one (step 085AKS013).

After executing the process of step 085 AKS013, the performance control CPU 120 erases the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the first start winning command buffer, and erases the memory contents of the pending display number "0" corresponding to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 085AKS014), the prefetch notice setting process is ended. In addition, regarding the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of first starting winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display production process of step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it afterward.

In the process of step 085AKS012, if it is determined that the received fluctuation designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command (step 074AKS012; Yes), the production control CPU 120 controls each of the second fluctuation designation commands corresponding to "2" to "4". The display position of the hold display is moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step 085AKS015).

After executing the process of step 085 AKS015, the performance control CPU 120 erases the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of second start winning, and erases the memory contents of the pending display number "0" corresponding to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 085AKS016), the prefetch notice setting process ends. In addition, regarding the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of second start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display production process of step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it afterward.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the production control CPU 120 first performs a special process based on, for example, the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the diagram display result is a "miss" (step S551). If it is determined that the special figure display result is a "lose" (step S551; Yes), the production control CPU 120, for example, executes the fluctuation pattern designation command (stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The fluctuation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not set as the reach mode. It is determined whether or not (step S552).

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of determined ornamental symbols that will be the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination (step S553). ). For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. A determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of a non-reach combination) is determined by referring to a pre-stored decorative pattern determination table for a non-reach combination.

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of determined decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination (step S554). ). For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining decorative symbols of a ready-to-win combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production, and selects a ready-to-win combination that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. The determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative pattern determination table of.

If it is determined in the process of step S551 that the special figure display result is not a "lose" (step S551; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "sudden". Or, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "sudden certainty" or a "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the production control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 for "sudden certainty" or "small hit" such as the opening chance. A combination of final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). For example, in response to either the variable pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 being specified by the variable pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 selects the final pattern that constitutes one of the plurality of types of open chance items. Determine the combination of fixed decorative symbols that will become the stop symbols. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a chance number that is updated by a random counter etc. provided in the performance control counter setting section is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 etc. is extracted. By referring to the above, it is sufficient to determine the combination of determined ornamental symbols constituting any one of the opening chances. For example, the chance number determination table includes odd numbers "3", "5", and "7" as chance numbers for a sudden jackpot, and "2" and "7" composed of even numbers as chance numbers for a small hit. 4", "6", etc. may be set.

In the process of step S555, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is neither a "sudden hit" nor a "small hit" (step S555; No), the production control CPU 120 displays a final stop symbol that constitutes a jackpot combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a production random counter, for example. Next, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 is adjusted by referring to a jackpot confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area are determined.

After executing any of the processes in steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 executes the lighting/extinguishing control process (step 085AKS021). The lighting/extinguishing control process is a process for controlling a predetermined lamp to be turned on and a predetermined lamp to be turned off to be turned off according to the lighting pattern and light emission mode determined in step 085AKS007 and step 085AKS008 in FIG. 10-10. This is performed every time variable display is started. This may cause problems such as when a specified lamp that is to be turned on is turned off, or when a specified lamp that is to be turned off is turned on, and in such cases, the player may become confused. Therefore, even if a problem occurs, a lighting/extinguishing control process is executed so that the desired lighting pattern can be achieved as soon as possible. Note that when a predetermined lamp is turned on in a manner that notifies that an error has occurred, the lighting/extinguishing control process may not be executed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the lighting/extinguishing control process executed in step 085AKS021 of FIG. 10-16. When the lighting/extinguishing control process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the lamp effect flag is set to the on state (step 085AKS022). When the lamp effect flag is on (step 085AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS023). In step 085AKS023, it may be determined whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be lit by checking the lighting pattern and light emission mode stored in the command buffer at the time of start winning.

When it is determined in step 085AKS023 that there is a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS023), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to light the predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS024). For example, if the lighting pattern stored in the starting winning command buffer is "PT4-3-01" and the lighting mode is "mode A", the variable display setting process When it is the variable display setting process for the variable display of the 1st time (when the information of the target that is the target of pre-reading is stored in the pending display number "3" in the starting winning command buffer), in step 085AKS025, when winning a winning Since the lamp 1 emits light in "blue", the lamp 1 (predetermined lamp 85AK002 on the left) is determined as the predetermined lamp to be lit, and the control to cause the lamp 1 to emit light in "blue" (control to light it) )I do. Note that the lamp 3 that lights up at the "first fluctuation" timing will be turned on when the lighting timing is reached in the variable display processing to be described later, and the lighting control will not be performed in the processing of step 085AKS025. . That is, in the process of step 085AKS025, control is performed to turn on a predetermined lamp that should be turned on before execution of the lighting/extinguishing control process, regardless of whether it is turned on or not.

After executing the process of step 085AKS024, or if it is determined in step 085AKS023 that there is no predetermined lamp to be turned on (step 085AKS023; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off. Determination is made (step 085AKS025). In step 085 AKS025, it may be determined whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off by checking the lighting pattern and light emission mode stored in the command buffer at the time of start winning.

If it is determined in step 085AKS025 that there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS025), or if it is determined in step 085AKS022 that the lamp effect flag is off (step 085AKS025; No), the effect control CPU 120: Control is performed to turn off a predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS026). For example, if the lighting pattern stored in the start winning command buffer is "PT4-3-01" and the lighting mode is "mode A", the variable display setting process In step 085AKS025, when the variable display setting process is performed for the variable display for the second time, since lamp 1 is emitting blue light at the time of winning, and lamps 2 and 3 are off, the lamp 2 and lamp 3 are (the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 and the right predetermined lamp 85AK004) are determined as the predetermined lamps to be turned off, and control is performed to turn off the lamps 2 and 3. That is, in the process of step 085AKS025, control is performed to turn off the predetermined lamp that should be turned off before executing the lighting/extinguishing control process, regardless of whether it is turned off or not.

After executing the process of step 085AKS026, or when it is determined in step 085AKS025 that there is no predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS025; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the lighting/extinguishing control process.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-16, after executing the process of step 085 AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S560 ). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (performance control pattern during special figure fluctuation) in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command. Set as a pattern. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the plurality of prepared performance control patterns (suspended display change patterns) in response to the execution setting of the suspended display change performance by the suspended display setting process in step S161, and Set as . Further, if it is determined in step S559 that the specific performance is to be executed, one of the performance control patterns (specific performance control patterns) corresponding to the execution of the specific performance is selected and set as the pattern to be used.

Following the process of step S560, the performance control CPU 120, for example, creates a performance provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (performance control timer setting section, etc.) in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command. The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the production control CPU 120, for example, sends a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special symbol variation production control pattern) determined in the process of step S559 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. By transmitting the information to That's fine.

After executing the process of step S562, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. end.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10-18 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer. Determination is made (step S801). For example, the production control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and when an end code is read from the production control pattern in response to the updated production control process timer value. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the ready-to-win production period for executing the ready-to-win production (step S801; No). S802). The ready-to-win performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that it is the ready-to-win performance period (step S802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win performance (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the reach effect period (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the lighting timing (lamp effect) for lighting a predetermined lamp as a lamp effect. timing) (step 085AKS031). As described above, the lighting timing is determined by determining the lighting pattern in the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. 10-10. If it is the lamp effect timing (step 085AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp effect control to light (light emit) a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS032). In step 085AKS032, control is performed to light (light emit) a predetermined lamp to be lit in accordance with the lighting pattern and light emission mode stored in the command buffer at the time of start winning of the variable display target. Further, in step 085AKS032, a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp to be lit. Note that the displayed predetermined image is an image of the same color as the light emitted from the predetermined lamp. For example, if the lighting pattern stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning is "PT4-3-01" and the lighting mode is "mode A", the variable display effect processing is executed from the winning of the target. When the process is during variable display for the first variable display (when the information on the target that is the target of pre-reading is stored in the pending display number "3" in the start winning command buffer), in step 085 AKS032, the light is turned on. Control is performed to cause the lamp 3 (the right-hand predetermined lamp 85AK004) to emit "green" light as the target predetermined lamp, and control is performed to display a "green" predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 3.

After executing the process of step 085AKS032, or if it is not the lamp production timing (step 085AKS031; No), the production control CPU 120 performs other mini Control is performed to execute effects during variable display, including games and variable display operations of decorative symbols (step S808), and the effect processing during variable display is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S809; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs decorations such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of symbols (step S810).

Subsequently, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the lamp performance end timing to end the lamp performance, that is, whether it is the timing to turn off the predetermined lamp (step 085AKS033). The end timing of the lamp effect is determined by determining the lighting pattern in the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. 10-10. If it is the lamp effect end timing (step 085AKS033; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the lamp effect flag to the off state (step 085AKS034), and performs control to turn off all the predetermined lamps (step 085AKS035). In the characteristic section 085AK of this embodiment, the end timing of the lamp effect is the end of the target variation.

After executing the process of step 085AKS035, or if it is determined in step 085AKS033 that it is not the end timing of the lamp effect (step 085AKS033; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as the reception waiting time for the jackpot start designation command. A time is set (step S811). Next, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S812), and ends the variable display performance process.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, an example of the effect operation when the lamp effect is executed will be described. In the examples shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01" is used to perform the lamp effect of the light emission mode of "Aspect A", and the variable display result is "Jackpot". The case is shown below. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the game ball enters the first starting prize slot when three holds are stored, hold display H1 to hold display H3, and a variable display is performed. When a prize is won, as shown in Figure 10-19 (B), a new pending display H4 is displayed, and the timing of "at the time of winning" in the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01" and the timing of "aspect A" are displayed. Based on the light emission mode, a predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side emits light in "blue", and a predetermined blue image (in the illustrated example, a star image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 1. be done. Note that at the start timing of the variable display shown in FIG. 10-19(A), control is performed to turn off lamps 1 to 3 through the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16.

As shown in Figure 10-19 (C), the variable display ends, and as shown in Figure 10-19 (D), the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 starts (the first time from the target of the lamp effect). When the timing at which the fluctuation starts, the process of step 085 AKS021 in FIG. When the lamp effect timing during the variable display is reached, the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side emits green light, and the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 3 A green predetermined image (a triangular image in the illustrated example) is displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation during the first fluctuation is determined by lottery as the lamp effect timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-19(E), the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 ends, and as shown in FIG. 10-19(F), the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 starts. When (the timing at which the second variation starts from the target of the lamp performance) comes, control to turn on lamps 1 and 3 and control to turn off lamp 2 is performed by the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (G), when the reach state is reached and the lamp performance timing during variable display corresponding to the pending display H2 comes, the central predetermined lamp is 85AK003 (lamp 2) emits "red" light, and a predetermined green image (in the illustrated example, a star-shaped heptagonal image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 2. In the illustrated example, the timing immediately after the ready-to-reach state during the second fluctuation is determined by lottery as the lamp performance timing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (H), the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 ends, and the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 starts, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (I). When (the timing at which the second variation starts from the target of the lamp performance) comes, control is performed to turn on the lamps 1 to 3 through the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16. After that, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 ends, the variable display corresponding to the hold display H4 is performed, and when the start timing (timing at which the target variation of the lamp effect starts) is reached, the steps in FIG. 10-16 are performed. Through the process of 085AKS021, control is performed to turn on lamps 1 to 3. Then, in the target variation which is the variable display corresponding to the pending display H4, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (J), the variable display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed, and the process of step 085 AKS035 in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-20(K), all the predetermined lamps from Lamp 1 to Lamp 3 are turned off, and the lamp effect ends. Note that the predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp may change during execution of the lamp effect, such as changing to mode B after displaying mode A, for example. In that case, the light emission mode of the corresponding predetermined lamp may also be changed. Further, when a predetermined lamp is made to emit light according to a predetermined lighting pattern in the lamp effect, a lighting pattern by another effect may be overwritten.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 085AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a lamp performance that sequentially causes a predetermined lamp to emit light over a plurality of variable displays as a pre-read preview performance. Then, regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light, the start timing of the variable display executed before the target of the lamp effect and the start timing of the variable display of the target of the lamp effect are "Aspect A". The predetermined lamp is caused to emit light in the determined light emitting mode among "Aspect B". According to this, since the predetermined lamp to be emitted emits light even before the variable display of the target, it is possible to eliminate the problem and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, when the lamp effect is not being executed, at the start timing of the variable display that is executed before the target of the lamp effect, control is performed to turn off the predetermined lamp regardless of whether the predetermined lamp is emitting light. When the effect is being executed, at the start timing of the variable display that is executed before the target of the lamp effect, the predetermined lamp is displayed in "Aspect A" and "Aspect B" regardless of whether the predetermined lamp is emitting light or not. Among them, control is performed to cause the predetermined lamp to emit light in the determined light emission mode. According to this, it is possible to prevent problems with lighting and turning off the lights, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lighting order of the predetermined lamps differs depending on the light emission mode of "Aspect A" and "Aspect B", it is possible to prevent a situation where only a specific predetermined lamp is not emitting light among a plurality of predetermined lamps, which increases the enjoyment of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the emitted light color of the predetermined lamp differs depending on the light emitting mode of "Aspect A" and "Aspect B", it is possible to prevent problems such as the light emitting color not being emitted in accordance with the performance, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. be able to. Furthermore, since the predetermined lamps to be turned off are controlled to be turned off at the start timing of the variable display, it is possible to prevent problems such as the lights not being turned off in accordance with the performance, and to suppress a decline in game interest.

Moreover, when the predetermined lamp is made to emit light, the performance control CPU 120 displays a predetermined image having the same color as the emitted light color of the predetermined lamp on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp. According to this, the light emitting mode of the predetermined lamp differs depending on the predetermined image, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, if the lamp effect is not executed, that is, if the determination is "No" in step 085AKS022 of FIG. control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined lamp that should normally be turned off from emitting light and giving the player a sense of unnecessary anticipation.

Furthermore, when some of the plurality of predetermined lamps are made to emit light and the other predetermined lamps are turned off, the predetermined lamps to be emitted are controlled to emit light regardless of whether they are emitting light or not; The predetermined lamp to be turned off is controlled to be turned off regardless of whether it is turned off or not. According to this, it is possible to cause the predetermined lamp to emit light and extinguish it in a light emission mode according to the effect.

(Modified example of characteristic part 085AK)
In the feature section 085AK, an example is shown in which the lamp effect end timing is the end of the target variation and the predetermined lamp is turned off at the end of the target variation, but this is just an example. The end timing of the ramp effect may be multiple timings, for example, at the end of the variation, when the super reach develops, or during the super reach effect, or any timing may be determined depending on the variation pattern of the target variation. good. Moreover, instead of turning off all the predetermined lamps at the same timing at the end timing of the lamp effect, the lights may be turned off in the same order as the order in which they were turned on. According to this, the lighting order can be notified to a player who has missed or forgotten in which lighting order the lights were turned on. In this case, it is desirable to turn off the light before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

Further, in the lamp effect in the feature section 085AK, an example was shown in which a predetermined image of the same color as the light emission color of the lamps 1 to 3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the accessory 85AK001, but this is only an example. A cooperative effect may be performed in which the display contents of the liquid crystal display device in the accessory 85AK001 and the display contents of the image display device 5 cooperate, and the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp may be a light emission mode that matches the cooperative effect. . For example, if character 1 (ally) and character 2 (enemy) play rock-paper-scissors three times on the image display device 5 and the ally wins, a predetermined lamp will be emitted, and a liquid crystal display corresponding to the predetermined lamp to be emitted will emit light. A cooperative effect may be performed, such as displaying an image on the display device that allows the user to recognize which of the words "goo", "choki", and "pa" has been given (the emitted light color is the same as in the above embodiment). In this case, for example, in the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01", an ally wins at rock-paper-scissors at three timings: when winning a prize, during the first variation, and during the second variation, and during the third variation, and during the target variation. In the middle two timings, it is enough for an ally to lose at rock, paper, scissors.

Further, in the characteristic section 085AK, the execution of the lamp effect is started when the lamp effect flag is set to the on state, and the execution of the lamp effect is ended when the lamp effect flag is cleared to the off state. Although an example has been shown, this is just one example. For example, execution of the lamp effect may be started when the timing for emitting light from the first predetermined lamp has arrived. Further, the execution of the lamp effect may be completed when all the predetermined lamps (the third predetermined lamp) are emitted. In this case, the start timing and end timing of the lamp effect may be determined when the lighting pattern is determined, and the processing of steps 085AKS033 to 085AKS035 in FIG. 10-18 may be executed before the processing of step 085AKS031.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 048AK, the characteristic portion 063AK, and the characteristic portion 085AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate. For example, when the setting suggestion effect is not performed in the feature section 063AK in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect using the stop symbol in the feature section 048AK may be executed. Further, for example, when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 in the feature section 063AK is executed in the ending effect, a setting suggestion effect in the feature section 048AK may be further executed, and in this case, the setting suggestion effect is different from that in FIG. 8-23. What is necessary is to refer to the table and execute the setting suggestion effect in the characteristic section 048AK. In other words, although it is suggested that the setting value is set to an advantageous value in aspect 1, the setting value is set to a high value so as not to suggest that the setting value is set to a disadvantageous value. What is necessary is to execute the setting suggestion effect in the feature section 048AK by referring to a table in which determination ratios are set for modes that suggest the presence of the user. According to this, the setting suggestion effect in the feature section 063AK and the setting suggestion effect in the feature section 048AK both suggest that the setting value is set to an advantageous value, giving the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game's interest. Moreover, the lamp performance may be performed as a setting suggestion performance instead of notifying the jackpot expectation level.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. a determining means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS005) for determining whether to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target is controlled to the advantageous state; Based on the determination result of the determining means, the suggestive performance execution means (for example, a lamp The predetermined light emitting means includes a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance, and a light emission mode determining means that determines a light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008). A plurality of are provided, and the order of emitting light is different depending on the light emission mode determined by the light emission mode determining means (for example, the light is emitted in the lighting order determined in step 085AKS008), and the suggesting effect execution means In the variable display of a target for which it has been decided not to perform the suggestive effect, the predetermined light emitting means may be emitted regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target. In a variable display of an object for which the determining means has determined to perform a process of turning off the light (for example, executing the process of step 085AKS021) and to perform the suggestive effect, in a variable display that is executed before the variable display of the object. Regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light, performing a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light (for example, executing the process of step 085AKS021, etc.), and further suggesting that the predetermined light emitting means be controlled to the advantageous state. Advantageous suggestion performance execution means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a hold display notice performance, a timer performance, a chance notice performance, etc.), and the advantageous suggestion performance is executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) for forewarning, and the advantageous suggestion performance is a first advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance). , a second advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation, and a third advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a chance indication) different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation and the second advantageous suggestion presentation. The preparatory performance includes a first preparatory performance (e.g., a pending display preview preparation performance) that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a preparatory performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. The third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period. Yes (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are more effective than when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is being executed. An example is a gaming machine in which the third advantageous suggestion performance is more likely to be performed when none of the above is performed (for example, see FIG. 12-10).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent problems with lighting and turning off the lights, and to suppress a decline in gaming interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent only a specific light emitting means from emitting light or not turning off the light among the plurality of predetermined light emitting means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Moreover, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

Furthermore, the third advantageous suggestion performance is better when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed than when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is executed. In order to facilitate execution and suitably maintain interest, the problem of lighting and extinguishing of a predetermined light emitting means in a variable display as a target of performance is prevented, so that interest can be maintained more suitably.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest by preventing problems with lights on and off, and can suitably maintain interest, there is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state), and is capable of performing an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. Suggestion performance execution means, and preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. The advantageous suggestion presentation includes a first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation), a second advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation, and the first advantageous suggestion presentation. The preparation performance includes a suggestion performance and a third advantageous suggestion performance different from the second advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a chance notice performance), and the preparation performance is a first preparation performance that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) and a second preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, a third advantageous suggestion performance, and a first preparation performance. and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is being executed. The third advantageous suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 153SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-34.

First, FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board (gauge) that constitutes the game board surface. The gaming machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown), and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 153SG003 and the glass. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is hit relatively weakly (hit to the left) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is a game area where the game ball is shot down by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the general winning hole 10 is arranged in the left gaming area 153SG002L, and in the right gaming area 153SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 153SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

Furthermore, a first pending storage display area 153SG005D and a second pending storage display area 153SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, a pending memory display is performed that specifiably displays the number of pending memories (special figure pending memory number) of a variable display corresponding to the special figure game.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the main board 11 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 153SG051 for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 153SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and a lock switch 153SG051 for changing the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can confirm the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052, is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate it when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by using the game machine frame 153SG003 to open it. Furthermore, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, only the clerk in possession of the setting key can operate the lock switch 153SG051. The lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 153SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, a single key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 153SG029 that can display set values and a base value to be described later is arranged in the board case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area) is A first special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first reservation display capable of displaying the number of first reservation memories. 153SG025A, a second reservation display 153SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 153SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 153SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 153SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 153SG002R, such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 153SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 153SG025A and second hold display 153SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the LED on the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment In section 153SG, the light goes out toward the left).

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. Therefore, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 153SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory is When the left two LEDs of display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure reservation memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments forming the round display 153SG131 differs depending on the jackpot type.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The performance control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

In addition, the production control board 12 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can operate between the respective origin positions and production positions during variable display etc. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and a second movable body 153SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 153SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that compose the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, etc.) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category that indicates whether the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is a command.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for specifying a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120). Command E101H is a hot start notification command that notifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery from power outage, also referred to as hot start). Command E102H is a cold start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started up (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data read operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is performed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into different types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Instead of first determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided to determine the type of variation. It is also possible to first determine the type of a variation pattern from a random number value for pattern type determination, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from among the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (performance content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach is off, if the set value is 1, it will be the variation pattern in which the normal reach is out, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect will be used. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern in which a non-reach result is performed twice and a non-reach result, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times and a super reach result is used, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-7(B), and the table shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, and the small hit It includes a fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal pattern display result determination table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Although the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment uses separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the setting value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200). 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state is different depending on each setting value (for example, depending on the setting If the value is 1, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by 1.5 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. The magnification is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). Good too.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability that the game state will be controlled is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small hit" and is controlled to a small win gaming state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see the display result for the first special figure when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33094, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the set value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33421. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are determined based on the winning determination value of 1020, regardless of the gaming state and setting value. The judgment value included in the numerical range of consecutive 1 consisting of The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical value range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure is different). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. That is, the winning of the jackpot and the small jackpot is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7 indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

Note that although the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment provides a total of six setting values, 1 to 6, as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more.

FIGS. 11-8(A) and 11-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-8 (A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-8(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 11-9. In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the transition to a low-probability-high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning hole in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. , the jackpot type is determined based on a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Note that in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (Jackpot A ) and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each of the variation patterns (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 200 are normal reach jackpot fluctuations. 201 to 550 are assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). 3) is assigned.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 997 are small hit fluctuation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small winning variation pattern in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more small winning variation patterns are provided. A variation pattern may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the variation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), in the variation pattern judgment table A for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 1 or less), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 450 out of the range of 1 to 997. 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α variation patterns. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 997 in the range of 1 to 997. 500 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α deviation. 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for the total pending memory number of 5 or more during low base), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 550 out of the range of 1 to 997. 551 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α variation patterns. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, there is a shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation pattern that corresponds to the time saving control. (PA2-2) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in Figure 11-11(D), in the variation pattern judgment table D for miss (high base medium), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 550 are non-reach variation. The range from 551 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where normal reach is off, and the range from 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach α is off (PA2-2). , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the losing variation pattern determination tables A to D, the proportion of non-reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns is set higher than the proportion of super reach variation patterns. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach α, and 901 to 997 is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach β. In other words, if the variable display result assigned to each variation pattern is a failure, the Super Reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display based on the Super Reach variation pattern is not executed. This can prevent the effectiveness from decreasing.

Note that in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach α and the determination ratio for the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach β are completely the same between each set value. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach β are based on the difference between each setting value. may differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

Note that although the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a failure, the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not the same, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or the percentage of variation between non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination ratios may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 11-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) to 11-11(C), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to perform a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to perform. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, variable display results, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display on the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. The first display section 153SG029A to the fifth display section 153SG29E are each composed of 7 segments formed by 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test target in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

The display monitor 153SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out in all game states, as shown in Figures 11-12 (B) and 11-12 (C). Base L, which is the real-time value during measurement; Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls of the first out in all game states; Base 2 is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6,000 pitches out for the second time, and the normal state for every 6000 pitches for the third out (low probability low base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed as percentages on the display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, in order to display the abbreviation "bL." for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B. " is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 1 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b1." which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 2 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b2.", which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 3 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of this embodiment, control is executed to sequentially display these bases L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors depending on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". 5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, a clerk at the gaming parlor can identify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by simply checking the display color on the display monitor 153SG029, without having the CPU 103 execute the setting value changing process described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 has an area for storing various data used for controlling performance operations, such as the one shown in FIG. 11-13(A), for example. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 153SG191, a production control timer setting section 153SG192, a production control counter setting section 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 153SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 153SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 153SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 153SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. At the same time, the stored contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG. It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the prefetch notice setting process (FIG. 11-18), which will be described later. A storage area for a pending display flag to be set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In addition, in the case where execution of the pending display notice performance is not determined in the prefetch notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the pending memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect. "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display for special modes (for example, blue or red cameras), A pending memory display in a manner different from the display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and in the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending memory display, the possibility of a jackpot or super It is foretold that there is a high possibility that it will be a reach, and that there is a high possibility that a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 will be executed.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered in the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol holding memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is being displayed in a variable manner at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (153SGSa001). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), the process advances to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not the setting value changing flag is set, which indicates that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power was cut off (the power cut occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed). (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clearing process described later has been executed is If set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with the clear switch being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010); if the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), proceed to 153SGSa011 without executing 153SGSa010. move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), execute setting value change processing (153SGSa013b) to change the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, proceed to 153SGSa013d, and clear the RAM clear flag. If not set (153SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the setting value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, each time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the lock switch 153SG051 being turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value that is newly stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. A command is output to the production control CPU 120.

Furthermore, in the setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be ended.

Note that in 153SGSa011, if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether to clear the RAM 102 (or execute the RAM clear process (153SGSa009)) when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time. 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), proceed to 153SGSa014 after executing RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e), and if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e) Proceed to 153SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes processing to set "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. This clears the contents of all addresses except for the dress in question.

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is checked when the power supply is stopped (power cutoff). Restoration processing is performed to return to the state (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power outage (booted with a hot start), transmits a command at the time of restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

If lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in RAM 102, RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the official procedure by the operation of an employee of the game parlor, etc. (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated while the pachinko game is played) When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

Note that if the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), or if the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process advances to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start, and transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the performance control board 12 (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and all segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 start blinking to start notification of a cold start. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 increments the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processes of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 153SG029 are executed. stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

Note that the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 blink for a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of a call and start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be made to blink. However, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) to initialize the random number circuit 104, and sets the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029) and interrupts are enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends a message to the production control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error) or that the power has recovered from a power outage during a setting change, which will be described later. 153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 increments the value of the error notification execution wait timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processes of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a setting value abnormal error occurs. The first display section 153SG029A, the second display section 153SG029B, the third display section 153SG029C, and the fourth display section 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, are used as a notification (error notification) that the power has recovered from a power outage during the occurrence of an error or a setting change. "E." is displayed in each of (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and controls the game through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the venue, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation such as an operation by a clerk at the game parlor), thereby controlling the display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B perform error occurrence notification.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that when an abnormal setting value is set or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage while changing the setting value, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the staff of the gaming hall can check the occurrence of an error and the settings from both the front and back sides of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the device has recovered from a power outage during a change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characteristic unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although a mode is illustrated in which the RAM clearing process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag, the present invention is not limited to this; is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008;Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021, but when determining that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS105 (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the special figure pending storage number corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" , numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 153SGS 109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 153SGS111, winning random value determination processing is executed (153SGS112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 153SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 153SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-16(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 153SGS 112 of FIG. 11-15 as the winning random value determination process. In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) is performed to change the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) to " Judgments are made as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state as a "big hit", and whether to control to the small win game state by treating the special figure display result as a "small win". In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of 153SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special pattern display result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a special pattern display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. A determination is made as to whether or not the display mode is a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot or small. Before starting the game, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a “big hit” or “small hit” and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result. Then, as will be described later, the performance control CPU 120 or the like starts to execute a pending display preview performance.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the CPU 103 first determines whether the pachinko game is played by checking the status of the time saving flag or probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section (not shown), for example. The current gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the variable time state is present when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and determines that the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are both off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that the state is normal.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. What is necessary is to set the second special figure display result determination table shown in (B).

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot judgment range) according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result judgment table, the special figure extracted at 153 SGS 109 in Figure 11-15 is It is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the corresponding jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, the individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing a point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the fluctuating display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot during variable display (153SGS123;N), it is further set to Pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment extracted at 153SGS109 in Figure 11-15 with reference to the small hit numerical range (small hit judgment range) according to the setting value set. It is determined whether or not it is within the corresponding small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range, the CPU 103 uses the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It is sufficient if it can be determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing the above. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

If it is determined in 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will not be a small hit during variable display (153SGS124;N), in response to the variable display result being "miss". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the error variation pattern determination table A (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), select the error variation pattern determination table A and set it (153SGS127). Select and set judgment table D (153SGSS128).

Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-11(D), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed. be.

Note that in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these deviation variation pattern determination table A and deviation variation pattern determination table D, a deviation pattern determination table that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 is provided. A fluctuation pattern determination table B for use and a fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure, which is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8, are prepared in advance, but as shown in Figure 11-11, these Among the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, values from 0 to 450 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. In the losing variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern (variation category) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be possible even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since the variation pattern is non-reach or super reach, the winning variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the winning start.

As shown in FIG. 11-16(A), if 153SGS123 determines that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that it will be a jackpot during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 153SG130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern as one of the plurality of jackpot fluctuation patterns. Set (153SG132).

In addition, if 153SGS124 determines that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit during variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is sent. Execute the settings (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the process of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values that include the random value MR3 (153SGS133). In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", "non-reach" is commonly displayed regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category with a variable display mode, a variable category with a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) of "Other". It is only necessary to provide a variable category and determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the performance control board 12 (153SGS134), and then the winning random value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-17 is a part of a flowchart of the production control process processing (S76) in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment. In the performance control process processing in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, after the prefetch notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. After executing the pending display update process that updates the display mode and number of pending memory displays shown in FIG. 11-13(B) according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed. It is designed to perform the following processing.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing the pre-read notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-17. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (153SGS242). If there is no entry whose pending display flag is not set, the prefetch notice setting process ends, and if there is an entry whose pending display flag is not set, the value of the pending display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether there is an entry that is set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag has already been set to one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display preview effect has already been executed, then the entry (the pending display flag is set in 153SGS242) Set "0" to the pending display flag of the entry for which the pending display notice effect is not executed (in other words, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry as "○"). The prefetch notice setting process ends (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the pending display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display preview effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, if a hold display preview effect has already been executed, execution of a new hold display preview effect is restricted.

If there is no entry whose pending display flag is set to one of the values 1 to 4 in 153SGS243, the production control CPU 120 selects the entry (the entry for which the pending display flag was determined not to be set in 153SGS242). ) determines whether the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and the jackpot type is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting section 153SG193, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice performance and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the jackpot pending display notice performance determination table (not shown), the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice performance and the pending display are determined. A display pattern for executing a preview effect is determined (153SGS246).

In the 153SG 246, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-19(A), the presence or absence of a pending display preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 153SGS245.

In the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the pending display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and the pending display is When the display pattern of the preview performance is determined to be the display pattern δ, the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. Further, when it is decided not to execute the pending display preview performance, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. At a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 20% it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 10%, a pending display notice effect in display pattern γ is decided to be executed. is decided to be executed, and it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probable variable jackpot), it is decided at a rate of 5% to not execute the pending display notice performance, and at a rate of 20%, it is decided to not execute the pending display notice performance in display pattern α. Execution is decided, and at a rate of 55% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ, and at a rate of 10% It is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ.

Returning to 153SGS244, if the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the production control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248), and, for example, uses the random number circuit 124 or production control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice performance extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the jackpot type specified in the 153SGS249, refer to a small hit/miss pending display notice performance determination table (not shown). By doing so, whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern are determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the pending display preview effect will not be executed; At a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern γ. It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance, and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss or a small hit and the variable category is other (if the normal reach is a miss or a small hit), it will be decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 75%, and at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern γ. It is decided to execute the performance, and it is decided to execute the suspended display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, it is decided at a rate of 55% not to execute the pending display preview effect, and at a rate of 25%, it is decided to not execute the pending display preview effect in the display pattern α. Execution is decided, and at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern β, at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern γ, and at a rate of 5% It is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 11-19(A) and 11-19(B), in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed, when the hold display preview performance is not executed, In addition, when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern β, it is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot becomes higher, and the player's expectation level for a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion performance described later, the degree of expectation for the control to be in a jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the display pattern α and the display pattern β (jackpot expectation level). is not set to be high, and the expectation level for the jackpot type to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot expectation level) is the same.

In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result becomes a jackpot are the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, and as shown in FIG. 11-19, the display patterns γ and The display pattern δ is determined when the variable display result is a jackpot or the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach. In other words, it is also suggested that the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (aspects of blue and red cameras) withholding memory display are variable displays of super reach that can execute setting suggestion effects to be described later. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-19 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when the special symbol fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than super reach, In this case, the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-18, after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, set the pending display flag of the entry to a value (one of 1 to 4) that corresponds to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and perform pre-reading. The notice setting process ends (153SGS247). Furthermore, if it has been decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0", which corresponds to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-read notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags that are stored in correspondence (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol that is being variably displayed, and the first to fourth special symbols in the first special symbol pending memory) The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271;N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the Various command data and various flags (i.e., when variable display is in progress Shift various command data and various flags corresponding to the 2nd special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the 1st to 4th 2nd special symbol pending memory) to the upper level by one buffer number. (153SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern designation command from the variable pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, determines that 3 symbols are even symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the stop symbols may include multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333'', ``555'', ``999'', etc.). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol) is determined as the stop symbol. do. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbol will be a chance symbol indicating a small hit (the 3rd symbol is based on a specific rule). ``334'', ``556'', ``778'', etc.) which are irregular. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach variation pattern, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach variation pattern, a rear variable display hint effect is performed during the reach effect of the variable display. A rear variable display suggestive effect determination process is executed to determine whether to execute the rear variable display suggestive effect and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect (153SGS278). In other words, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion performance (jackpot suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance) is a variation of the variation pattern of the super reach with a long special symbol variation time. It can only be executed on the display, and it will not be executed on the variable display of normal reach or non-reach variation patterns where the special symbol variation time is short.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the variable display result becomes a jackpot as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. In addition, it is possible to perform a character performance suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot and also suggests a period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. , During the reach performance which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggestion production that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a suggestion production during the rear variable display, or a setting that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to perform suggestive performances. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether to execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance during the reach performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. .

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion performance (either the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance) during the rear variable display in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided in the processing of 153SGS278 not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the process advances to 153SGS285, and if it is decided in the processing of 153SGS278 to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the front part is further changed from the start of the variable display. Front variable display suggestive performance determining processing is executed to determine which of the character performance and timer performance is to be executed as the variable display suggestive performance (153SGS280). In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is not determined. In the variable reach and normal reach displays, timer effects and character effects are not performed as suggested effects during the front variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggested performance during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the wait timer for starting the suggestion effect during the rear variable display indicates the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in Figure 11-28 (A)). 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the hint effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in Figure 11-28 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is a 25-second effect) 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect if the timer effect is pattern TS-1, and 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect if the timer effect is pattern TS-2, which has a 30 second effect) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control is executed for the device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 153SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (153SGS290).

FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing the rear variable display suggestive effect determination process (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the rear variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) to flag the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display. (153SGS301). In addition, in this process, if the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is specified. If the display start command reception flag is set, it is sufficient to specify the entry "2-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display based on the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, if the pending display preview effect is being executed for the variable display in question. If not, at a rate of 90% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the variable rear display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is decided to execute a set suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display. In addition, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If so, at a rate of 50% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 50% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, 30 At a rate of 35%, it is decided to not execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to perform the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, the value is 0. At a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to perform a suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect.

In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed for the variable display, the performance is higher than when the hold display preview performance is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect for the variable display (if the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined based on the ratio, and the pending memory display was displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case of the rear variable display.

In addition, we focused on cases where the pending memory display was displayed with a blue or red camera (when the value of the pending display flag was "3" or "4") as a pending display preview effect for the variable display. Then, if the pending memory display was displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is decided at a higher rate than when the rear variable display is displayed. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as a suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the rear variable display.

From the above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, if the pending memory display is displayed in a rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice performance for the variable display, the rear variable display suggestion performance is While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview performance targeting the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. Since the proportion of setting suggestion presentations being executed as suggestion presentations during the rear variable display is higher than when the rear variable display is displayed, there is a higher probability that the setting suggestion presentation will be executed as a suggestion presentation during the rear variable display. It is now possible to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is decided in the processing of 153SGS302 not to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302, further In the process of , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302, a performance pattern for the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 11-22(B), a total of three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS305. Among these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation: low) that suggests that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is Pattern AS-3 is a performance pattern that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is higher than pattern AS-1 (jackpot expectation: medium), and pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot. This is a performance pattern that suggests a high level of success (expectation level of jackpot: high).

In the process of the 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 11-23, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance to pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when it is decided in the process of 153SGS302 to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and selects the setting value (pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified setting value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS307).

As shown in FIG. 11-22(B), a total of five patterns, pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (for example, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that it is determined whether the setting value is 5 or 6 (high setting). For patterns SS-3 and SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, the expectation level for the setting value to be 5 or 6 is considered to be low. 6 is said to have high expectations.

Note that in this feature section 153SG, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low settings and setting values 4 to 6 may be high settings. However, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

In the processing of the 153SGS 307 described above, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60% when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. 11-24. 1, pattern SS-2 is selected at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 6%, and pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Decided on SS-5. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In this way, in this feature section 153SG, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, it is suggested that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by performing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5, it is determined that the setting value is 6.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing the front variable display suggestive effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the front variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). Further, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result, whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during the front variable display and the suggestion during the front variable display. The performance to be executed is determined from the character performance and the timer performance (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-26 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to not execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. At 30%, it is decided to execute a character presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display, and at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a timer presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, 70% of the time it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a higher rate during the front variable display than when the variable display result is a loss. It is decided to execute the suggestion effect, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the character effect and the timer effect are determined at the same rate as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result If it is a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance. It is set.

In addition, if execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the suggestion effect during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and the suggestion effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-26 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. At 70%, it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, at a rate of 80% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the ratio of the variable display result to the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the setting is such that, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, the execution of the character effect will not be determined as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. That is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance.

For this reason, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the timer effect is decided at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so the front variable display is indicated. When a timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion effect during front variable display (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the process for determining the suggestion effect during the front variable display ends, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further It is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a character presentation as a suggested presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

If it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggested performance during the front variable display, a performance pattern for the character performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining a suggested performance during the front variable display is ended. (153SGS317).

Furthermore, as the effect patterns for character effects that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, there are a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, as shown in FIG. 11-26(C). . Among these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation level: low) that suggests that by displaying character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is the lowest. Yes, pattern CS-2 is a production pattern (Jackpot expectation: medium) that suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots by displaying character B (not shown) on image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-27(A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the character performance to pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. , and pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the performance pattern of the character performance is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the above-mentioned part variable display suggestive effect determination process is ended (153SGS318).

As the performance patterns of the timer performance that can be determined in the processing of the 153SGS 318, a total of two performance patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided as shown in FIG. 11-26(C). Among these performance patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 for character performances (Jackpot expectation: high ), this is a performance that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display together with the image of character It suggests that this is higher than the character performance pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (jackpot expectation level: high), and the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is shown for 25 seconds with the image of character Y. (See Figures 11-27(C), 11-29(D), and 11-29(E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. In addition, if the rear variable display suggestion performance that has been decided to be executed is a setting suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decided on 2.

In other words, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2) (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1), When the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the rate at which the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance period of the timer performance and the characters displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is possible to make the player expect the setting suggestion effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display, the suggestion effect during front variable display is The expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than when the character performance is executed as a character performance, and the probability of a jackpot is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. The performance is now executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-20 to 11-28, when it is decided to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display suggestive effect during the variable display process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the front variable display suggestive effect may be set, and the effect device may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172). In addition, when it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the value of the rear variable display suggestive effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display becomes 0, process data corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display rendering process (S172), the rendering device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(A) and 11-28(B), the jackpot suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display in this characteristic part 153SG are performed during the execution period of the reach performance. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special symbol variation time of the non-reach variation pattern (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance.

Next, the performance mode during variable display in the main feature section 153SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-29 to 11-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) and 11-29(B), a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting winning, a pending memory display is displayed as a pre-read preview effect. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. .

As shown in FIGS. 11-29(C) to 11-29(E), when a new variable display corresponding to the hold memory display mode of the camera is started, the front A timer effect as a suggestive effect during variable display is started. At this time, if the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-29(D), the image 153SG005X of the character A timer update display is started for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive performance during variable display. In addition, when the performance pattern of the timer performance is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. The timer starts updating and displaying for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive effect is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-30(F) to 11-30(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display up to the suggestive effect during rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during execution of the super reach performance (the timer performance ends), a jackpot suggestion performance or a setting suggestion performance is started as a suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (I). , a message such as "Chance!" indicating that the expectation level of jackpot is low is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, the pattern shown in FIG. 11-30 (J) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11, a message such as "It's hot!" indicating that the jackpot expectation level is higher than pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined performance pattern is pattern AS-3. As shown in -30(K), a message such as "Super Hot!" is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the jackpot expectation level is higher than that of pattern AS-2.

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in Figures 11-31 (L) to 11-31 (P). In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, so that the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the performance pattern of the setting value suggestion performance is pattern SS-5, the setting value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all characters displayed on the image display device 5 in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-read notice, the pending memory display is The settings suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the player may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone to suggest the settings in advance, expecting that the setting suggestion effect will be executed. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the performance. In other words, the pending storage display in the form of a blue or red camera in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect that prompts the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character performance and a timer performance with a higher jackpot expectation level than the character performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display that suggests a jackpot expectation level, and FIG. -26 (D), when a timer effect is executed during variable display, setting suggestion effects are used as suggestion effects during rear variable display at a higher rate than when character effects are executed during variable display. executed. In other words, when a timer effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a character effect is executed, and the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as a front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so the setting suggestion effect can be executed. By being executed, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIG. 11-29 (D) and FIG. 11-29 (E)). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the timer effect may include, for example, displaying an increase or decrease on a gauge or meter to indicate that the rear variable display is in progress. The period up to the start of execution of the performance may not be clearly announced (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(D) and 11-29(E), a mode in which the timer effect is executed by displaying an image on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and display means other than the image display device 5. Any one of the display modes or a combination of a plurality of display modes may be executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (H) and 11-31 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as a timer effect. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion performance may be executed as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display in addition to the setting suggestion performance. In other words, even if the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so it is possible to create surprise and improve the game's enjoyment.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect reaches 0, a setting suggestion effect and a jackpot suggestion effect are performed as a suggestion effect during rear variable display. Although a mode in which only one of these can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to execute both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, a suggestion effect during rear variable display is always executed. The invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-27 (B) and 11-27 (C), the performance patterns of the timer performance include pattern TS-1 in which the performance period is 25 seconds and pattern TS-1 in which the performance period is 30 seconds. TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28, since the rear variable display suggestion performance including the setting suggestion performance is executed during the reach performance period which is the latter half period of the super reach variable display, the setting suggestion performance by the player It is possible to further prevent overlooking.

In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period which is the latter half period of the super reach variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the first half period of the variable display of super reach.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-22, the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-read notice is changed to a white rectangle or star shape, or a blue or red camera. It is possible to execute a pending display preview effect that can be displayed depending on the display mode, etc., and the display mode is a variable display that corresponds to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is a blue or red camera mode. It is possible to decide whether to execute the setting suggestion performance at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display format is a white rectangle or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the camera mode where the display mode is blue or red, the player depends on whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot. Since the setting suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the pending memory display that is the target of the pending display preview effect when the pending display preview effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display preview performance ends). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display that is the target of the pending display preview effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect. This can be further prevented.

In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-read notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pending display notice may be used as a pre-read notice. It is also possible to enable a performance other than the performance, and to suggest that a setting suggestion performance is performed as a performance mode of the performance.

Furthermore, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a setting suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display corresponding to a pending memory display that is a target of a pending display notice effect (a variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, the percentage of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a white square or star as a pre-read preview effect. Since the display rate is set lower than the display rate, the display of the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera makes it easier to play the game than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star. This makes it possible to attract the attention of the technician, and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a white square or star as a pre-reading preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the suspended memory display may be displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-read preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white rectangle or star shape as a pre-reading preview effect, or it may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio of displaying in the form and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white rectangle or star as a prefetch preview performance may be the same.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, as a pending display preview effect, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby informing the player of preparations for photographing the setting suggestion effect. Since the player is prompted to do so, the player can prepare a digital terminal such as a smartphone before the setting suggestion performance starts, and the success rate of the player in photographing the setting suggestion performance can be increased.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect, the player is informed of preparations for photographing the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the display from the speakers 8L and 8R Alternatively, the player may be prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion performance by outputting a sound, displaying a message image on the image display device 5, or the like.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a display pattern γ in which the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera and a display pattern δ in which the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera are used to create a pending display preview effect. If it is executable, and as shown in Figure 11-22 (A), the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the pending display flag is 3), and the pending memory display is displayed in red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different between the case where the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4) and the case where the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the pending memory display is not displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the mode does not change, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the reserved memory display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. In addition, a case is provided in which a suspended memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as an active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from a blue camera mode to a red camera mode. It's okay. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display ends, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is limited to the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It is possible to execute it, and it will not be executed in the variable display of normal reach or non-reach variation patterns where the special figure variation time is short, so the setting suggestion effect is suppressed from being executed during the short variable display period, and the game This prevents the person from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-6 and 11-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance while it is being displayed (during execution of the reach performance).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is a super reach that can perform setting suggestion effects. Since this indicates that the display is variable, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, if the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if the special symbol fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than the super reach, a hold display is displayed. Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a preview effect, players may have noticed that the pending memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from being not executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory display being a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-20 to 11-28, during the variable display of Super Reach, it is possible to perform suggestion effects during the front variable display, including timer effects, but it is possible to perform suggestion effects during the variable display of Super Reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach where the figure fluctuation time is short, the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect.The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the performance due to the execution of the above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, as a suggestion effect during front variable display. The expectation of jackpot is set higher than when the character performance is executed, and the suggestion performance is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, a timer effect may be executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display. If the ratio for determining character performance is set lower than the ratio for determining execution of a character performance as a suggestion performance during front variable display, and if a timer performance is executed as a suggestion performance during front variable display, The setting suggestion effect may be set to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as a pre-read notice, a pending memory display is displayed in a white square, a star shape, or a blue color in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5. 11-33(A) and 11-33(A) as modified example 153SG-2 have been exemplified. As shown in FIG. 11-33(B), when the pending storage display is displayed in the first pending storage display area 153SG005D or the second pending storage display area 153SG005U, the first pending storage display area 153SG005D is displayed on the image display device 5. If the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the effect image 153SG005E or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, at least the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera It is also possible to display the reserved memory display in the form such that it is not hidden by the effect image 153SG005E. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the pending memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 153SG005E blocking the pending memory display of the blue or red camera mode. be able to.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion performance can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 153SG-3, as shown in Figures 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), a setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach or non-reach without shortening. Good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for a period of 3 seconds (shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-22(A), the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera and the form of a red camera as the pending display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and as a modification 153SG-4, a mode of a camera in which the pending memory display is blue is illustrated. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be made different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the form of a red camera or in the form of a red camera. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera or the form of a red camera as a pending display preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as the start timings of the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display of the super reach. Although we have exemplified a form in which it is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display by executing the suggestion effect during the rear variable display based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification Example 153SG- 5, if the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect will be patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may also be executed using a performance pattern that suggests a high setting value, such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the effect executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed by only one of the display mode of the pending storage display and the display mode of the pending storage display. Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which setting suggestion performance can be executed as suggestion performance during rear variable display during variable display in which timer performance is executed as suggestion performance during front variable display. , the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a jackpot, the setting suggestion effect is set during the jackpot game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the execution of a new pending display notice performance is restricted when a pending display notice performance has already been executed, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display preview performance has already been executed, the execution of only some display patterns of the new hold display preview performance may be restricted. For example, if a hold display preview performance has already been executed in display pattern γ or display pattern δ (if the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display preview performance will be executed. It is restricted only to what is executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (the reserved memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display preview performances with different suggested contents. Furthermore, in the case where the pending display preview performance has already been executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, it is possible to restrict the execution of a new pending display preview performance in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed. In addition, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (if the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect will be executed. By restricting only what is executed in display pattern γ or display pattern δ (the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not. This can attract even more attention from the players.

Note that although the feature section 153SG of the embodiment exemplifies a form in which a pending display preview effect can be executed as a pre-read effect in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this; In other words, it may be possible to perform performances other than the pending display preview performance as long as they can be executed at a timing before the start of the target variable display.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a mode in which a character presentation and a timer presentation can be executed as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display that suggests that the variable display result is a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion performance during the front variable display, any performance other than the character performance or the timer performance may be possible as long as it is a performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 092IW)
Next, the characteristic part 092IW will be explained. This feature section 092IW executes a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display will be a jackpot, and a preparation performance that foretells that the jackpot suggestion production will be executed before the jackpot suggestion production is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion performance whose execution is foretold by the preparation performance is the pre-reading preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display whose execution is pending), and the jackpot confidence in the variable display during execution. It may be either a preview performance that foretells the degree. This feature section 092IW can execute a hold display preview performance, a timer performance, and a chance preview performance as jackpot suggestion performances. In addition, as a preparatory performance that foretells that the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed, a hold display is displayed that foretells that the hold display preview performance will be executed before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed. It is possible to perform a preview preparation performance and a timer preparation performance that foretells that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed.

FIG. 12-1 is a part of a flowchart of the effect control process processing (step S76) in this feature section 092IW. In the production control process processing in this feature section 092IW, after executing the pre-read notice setting process (step S161) in which judgment, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read notice performance shown in FIG. A prefetch notice execution process (step 092IWS162) is executed, and then one of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a pre-read notice setting process (step S161) executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the pre-read notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command at the time of one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether a set of starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, fluctuation category designation commands, and pending storage number notification commands are newly stored in the starting winning reception command buffer. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in the RAM 122. In this example, since the upper limit of the number of first pending memories and the number of second pending memories is 4, the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning has four storage spaces each corresponding to the first pending memory and the second pending memory. An area is provided. If no new command has been received for one set of starting winnings, the process is immediately terminated.

If a new command at the time of one set of starting winnings has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a pre-read preview performance is being executed (step 092IWS001). If a pre-read preview effect is being executed, the process is immediately terminated (that is, a new pre-read preview effect is not executed).

If the pre-read preview performance is not being executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is immediately terminated (that is, no new prefetch preview effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

If the number of pending memories is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the pending display preview effect and the mode of effect when executing the effect (step 092IWS003).

The pending display preview performance is a performance that suggests that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a jackpot by changing the display mode of the pending storage display (and active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this feature part 092IW, as a pending display preview effect, a pattern is shown in which the display mode is changed at the time when the pending memory display is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may also include a pattern in which the display mode is displayed in a normal mode when the screen is displayed as an active display, and the display mode is changed when the screen is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be configured to be able to execute a pending display preview performance that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or active display at any timing from the start winning time until the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the hold display preview preparation performance that foretells that the hold display preview performance will be executed may also be configured to be executable at any timing from the start winning time to the end of the target variable display. Further, the display mode of the pending storage display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In this case, it may be possible to execute a corresponding hold display preview preparation performance for each hold display preview performance.

FIG. 12-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview effect determination table. In step 092IWS003, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and with reference to the pending display notice performance determination table, the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-reach", Based on whether it falls under "Super Reach Missed", "Jackpot other than Jackpot A", or "Jackpot A", the pending display notice performance will be changed to "No execution Pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "Execution" Decided to be one of the following: "Yes, pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)", "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)", and "Execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)" do.

In the pending display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(A), a judgment value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned to each winning judgment result. The percentage of judged values is shown. In other words, for each prize-winning judgment result, regarding the pending display preview performance, "No execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "Execution pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)", "Execution pending memory display" The ratio of which is determined is shown is "display: second performance mode (green)" and "execution pending storage display: third performance mode (red)". In this example, in addition to the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(A), the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(B) and the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-4(A) are used. Regarding the timer performance determination table, the timer preparation performance determination table shown in FIG. 12-4(B), and the chance preview performance determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A), in order to simplify the explanation, any decision matter is The proportion determined is shown.

The characteristics of the pending display preview effect determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-3 (A), in the pending display notice performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", the pending display notice performance is "No Execution" compared to when it is "Lose". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of decisions that are determined to be ``executed'' is higher than that of ``execution.''. In addition, in the pending display preview production determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", "Execution pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)" is "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)" and "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)" are determined to be "Execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)." Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the hold display preview effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is more effective than the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is greater than the second effect mode (green). This suggests that when executed, it will be a jackpot. That is, the degree of expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of third presentation mode (red)>second presentation mode (green)>first presentation mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS003 not to execute the pending display preview effect (N in step S092IWS004), the process moves to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 A suspended display preview performance flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the display preview performance is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the pending display preview preparation performance (step S092IWS006). The hold display preview preparation performance is one of the preparation performances, and is used to foretell that the hold display preview performance will be executed before the hold display preview performance is executed.

FIG. 12-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for effect determination is extracted, and with reference to the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the pending display notice preparation effect is selected as "No execution" or "Execution" based on the performance mode of the pending display notice preparation effect. Decide on either "with execution, 1st production mode (small effect)" or "with execution, 2nd production mode (large effect)."

The characteristics of the pending display preview preparation effect determination table will be explained. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the pending display notice preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the pending display notice preparation performance is that the performance mode will be a jackpot, the more the pending display notice preparation performance is "executed". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of determinations that are determined to be "with execution" is higher than with "no execution." In addition, in the hold display preview preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the hold display preview performance that will be a jackpot, the higher the performance mode that is expected to lead to a jackpot, the higher the performance mode is the "first performance mode with execution (small effect)". Judgment values are assigned such that the ratio of "2 production mode (large effect)" is determined to be high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the pending display preview preparation effect is executed, and further when it is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) rather than the first effect mode (small effect). That will happen. That is, the expectation level of hitting the jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of pending memories is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the number of pending memories is not 3 or more, the process is immediately terminated. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode when executing it (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot from the start timing of the target variable display, and also suggests the period until the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect during rear variable display in the characteristic section 153SG). It's a performance.

In this characteristic part 092IW, since the timer effect is executed during the target variable display, for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171) of the variable display for which it is decided to execute the timer effect, the timer effect is executed. This is achieved by setting a performance control pattern and executing various performance controls based on the performance control pattern in the variable display performance process (S172).

Note that this is not limited to the configuration of the feature section 092IW, and for example, it may not be determined whether or not to execute a timer effect at the time of starting winning, but may determine whether or not to execute a timer preparation effect, which will be described later, and the mode of effect when executed. When the target variable display is started, it may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect. Further, in this case, depending on whether or not to perform the timer preparation performance and the performance mode, whether or not to perform the timer performance and the performance mode when executing the timer performance may be determined at different rates.

Furthermore, for example, the timer effect may be started during a variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at a timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the target variable display is started. You may start it. That is, the timer effect may be started at any timing from the timing of the starting prize winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation performance that foretells that the timer performance will be executed, any timing from the timing of the starting prize winning until the target variable display ends (however, until the time when the execution period of the timer performance can be secured) You may also start with .

FIG. 12-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092IWS008, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the timer performance determination table is referred to to determine whether the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-super reach" or "super reach". Based on whether the timer effect corresponds to “out of reach” or “super reach jackpot”, the timer effect is “no execution”, “first effect with execution (25 seconds)” and “second effect with execution (30 seconds)”. (Seconds)".

The characteristics of the timer effect determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-4 (A), in the timer performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", the timer performance is more likely to be "No Execution" than "No Execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of executions determined to be "executed" is high. In addition, in the timer performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", "1st performance mode with execution (25 seconds)" is better than "2nd performance with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned such that the percentage determined for "Aspect (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the timer effect is executed, and when it is executed in the second effect mode (30 seconds) rather than the first effect mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the expectation level for a jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS008 not to execute the timer effect (N in step S092IWS009), the process moves to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the timer preparation performance (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation performance is one of the preparation performances, and is used to foretell that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed.

FIG. 12-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the timer preparation performance determination table is referred to, and based on the performance mode of the timer performance, the timer preparation performance is determined to be ``no execution'', ``with execution, first performance mode ( Decide on either "Execution (second effect)" and "Second production mode with execution (large effect)".

The characteristics of the timer preparation performance determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-4 (B), in the timer preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the timer preparation performance that will be a jackpot, the more likely the timer preparation performance is to be executed than ``no execution''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of "Yes" decisions is high. In addition, in the timer preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation of the timer performance to be a jackpot, the more likely it is that the ``first performance mode with execution (character A)'' is better than the ``second performance mode with execution (character A)''. The determination values are assigned so that the percentage of characters determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the timer preparation performance is executed, and when it is executed in the second performance mode (character B) rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the expectation level for a jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (character B)>first presentation mode (character A)>no execution.

This feature section 092IW is configured such that the performance mode of the executable jackpot suggestion performance differs depending on which performance mode of the preparation performance is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), when the hold display preview preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display is executed by any of the first to third effect modes. When the preview performance is executed and the hold display preview preparation performance in the second performance mode is executed, the hold display preview performance is executed in one of the second to third performance modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), when the timer preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the timer performance is executed according to any of the first to second performance modes, and the timer preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed. When the timer effect in the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in the second effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the level of expectation depending on the performance mode of the preparation performance, and for each performance mode of the preparation performance (i.e., each expectation level), it is possible to vary the level of expectation depending on the performance mode of the preparation performance (that is, for each expectation level). It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation.

Further, in this feature section 092IW, the jackpot suggestion performance is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation performance. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance or the timer performance, it may be determined that the hold display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance will not be executed (Figure 12-3 (B), Figure 12- 4(B)). The ease of execution is configured to vary depending on whether or not an incompatible preparation performance has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3, if the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is likely to be determined to execute the pending display preview performance and the pending display preview preparation performance. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, it is likely to be determined that a timer effect is also executed. However, it may be determined not to execute the timer preparation performance. Then, when the hold display preview preparation performance that does not correspond to the timer performance is executed, the timer performance is more likely to be executed than when the hold display preview preparation performance is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

Note that this feature section 092IW is configured such that when a preparation performance is executed, a corresponding jackpot suggestion performance is always executed, but for example, as a preparation performance, a corresponding jackpot suggestion performance may be executed after the performance. It may be configured to be able to perform a normal preparation performance in which the game is performed and a fake preparation performance in which the corresponding jackpot suggestion performance is not performed after the performance. In this case, when the false pending display notice preparation performance is executed, compared to when the false pending display notice preparation performance is not executed, the timer performance (which may or may not be accompanied by a timer preparation performance) It may be possible to increase the rate of execution of the program (even if the program is not executed). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the pending display preview preparation performance is fake, and it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest.

In addition, this feature section 092IW is configured such that the ratio of which presentation mode of jackpot suggestion presentation is executed varies depending on whether or not the preparation presentation has been executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the hold display preview performance and the timer preparation performance is determined to be the second performance mode, compared to the case where the performance mode is determined to be the first performance mode, the hold display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance are The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance preview performance (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye preview performance is performed by deriving and displaying a chance eye pattern (in this example, a combination of decorative patterns that is "123") as a display result of a variable display that is executed before the target variable display. This is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays whose target variable display is not specified and is stored pending) will be a jackpot.

FIG. 12-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance preview performance determination table. In step 092IWS012, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the chance eye preview performance determination table is referred to to determine whether the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-super reach", Based on whether it falls under any of "super reach miss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", and "jackpot A", either "no execution" or "execution" is determined for the chance eye preview performance.

The characteristics of the chance preview performance determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-5 (A), in the chance eye preview performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case where it is "miss", the chance eye preview performance is "No Execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of decisions that are determined to be ``executed'' is higher than that of ``execution.''. With such a configuration, when the chance preview effect is executed, it is suggested that a jackpot will be achieved.

This feature section 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display preview performance, a timer performance, and a chance notice performance as jackpot suggestion performances, but FIGS. 12-3 (A), 12-4 (A), and As shown in 12-5 (A), with regard to the chance preview performance, the percentage of execution when the prize winning judgment result is a jackpot is lower than that of the pending display announcement display or the timer performance, and the percentage of execution when the winning judgment result is a jackpot is lower. Since the percentage of winnings is high, the difference in the percentage of execution is small when the winning determination result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower in the chance preview performance than in the hold display preview performance or the timer performance.

If it is determined in step 092IWS012 not to execute the chance notice effect (N in step S092IWS013), the process moves to step S092IWS015, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye preview performance flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the eye preview performance is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, if the pending display preview performance flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the performance control CPU 120 displays a new pending memory display in accordance with the determination of the pending display preview preparation performance (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, if it is determined to execute the pending display preview preparation performance in the first performance mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the pending memory display in the normal mode. A small effect image (for example, see the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 12-11 (B1)) is displayed near the . In addition, when it is determined to execute the pending display preview preparation performance in the second presentation mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and also displays an effect near the pending memory display. A large image (for example, see the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 12-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS017), It is checked whether the pending display preview preparation performance is the first performance mode (step S092IWS018). If the pending display preview preparation performance is the first performance mode (Y in step S092IWS018), the performance control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation performance (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022, which will be described later), for example, if it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character A that foretells that the timer effect will be executed. An image (for example, see image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 12-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image that foretells that the timer effect will be executed.

If the pending display preview production flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N in step S092IWS015), the production control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in the normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing the advance notice execution process (step 092IWS161) that the performance control CPU 120 executes in the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the pre-read notice execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the pending display notice performance flag is set (Step 092IWS102) if it is the shift timing of the pending memory (Y in step 092IWS101). .

If the hold display preview performance flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the hold display preview preparation performance is being executed (step 092IWS103).

If the hold display preview preparation performance is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the performance control CPU 120 ends the hold display preview preparation performance and executes the hold display preview performance (step 092IWS104).

Next, if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

If the timer preparation performance is not being executed (N in step 092IWS103), the performance control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation performance (step 092IWS107).

Next, the execution timings of the hold display preview performance, the hold display preview preparation performance, and the timer performance and timer preparation performance will be explained. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the hold display preview performance (preparation performance) and the timer performance (preparation performance).

FIG. 12-7(A) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance and the pending display preview preparation performance at the time of starting winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetch notice setting process shown in Figure 12-2), and is held at the shift timing of the pending memory. After the display preview preparation performance is completed, the suspended display preview performance is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetched preview execution process shown in FIG. 12-6).

FIG. 12-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 12-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. After the timer preparation performance is completed, the timer performance is started (for example, a performance control pattern for executing the timer performance is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and an output control pattern is set in the variable display performance process (S172)). (This is realized by executing various performance controls based on patterns).

FIG. 12-7 (C) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (first performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2), and , a timer preparation effect is started (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display preview preparation performance is completed and the pending display preview performance is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetched preview execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). Thereafter, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), a effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, This is realized by executing various effects controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 12-7 (D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display preview preparation performance (first performance mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the advance preview setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (e.g., corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preliminary effect is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetch notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). , a timer preparation effect is started (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). Thereafter, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), a effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, This is realized by executing various effects controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the timer preparation performance will be described. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the timer preparation performance.

FIG. 12-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. Corresponds to example -7(D).

As shown in FIGS. 12-8(A) and (B), a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting winning, a pending display notice performance and a pending display notice preparation performance (second presentation mode) When it is decided to execute the timer performance and the timer preview preparation performance (first performance mode), a new pending memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first pending memory display area 092IW001 and the second pending memory display area 092IW002. Ru. At this time, the pending display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) is started, and a lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a is displayed near the new pending storage display. Note that the timer notice preparation performance is restricted from being executed at the same time as the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-8(C) to 12-8(D), when the variable display ends, the pending memory is shifted, and a new variable display starts, the pending display notice is prepared. The performance (second performance mode) ends progressively (for example, a display control is performed in which the lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a acts on the pending memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the pending memory display changes to red. A pending display preview performance (third performance mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A is displayed, which foretells that the timer effect will be executed.

After that, as shown in Figures 12-8 (F) to 12-8 (G), when a new variable display that is the target of the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is advanced. Then, a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This feature section 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display preview performance and a timer performance as a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display will be a jackpot. In addition, there is a hold display preview preparation effect that foretells that the hold display preview effect will be executed before the hold display preview effect is executed, and a timer that foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. The preparatory performance is configured to be executable as a preparatory performance.

Such a preparation performance has the function of drawing attention to the jackpot suggestion performance that is executed after the preparation performance, but if multiple preparation performances are executed at the same time, the player's expectations will become too high, and as a result, it will not be possible to hit the jackpot. If this is not the case, there is a risk that interest will be greatly diminished. Therefore, in this feature section 092IW, it is restricted that a plurality of preparation performances are executed at the same time. Specifically, the hold display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) and the timer preparation performance have different execution periods and are configured so that they are not executed at the same time (in this example, the hold display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) is configured such that they are not executed simultaneously. After the execution of the second presentation mode) is completed, the timer preparation presentation is executed (see FIG. 12-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) and the timer preparation performance are configured so that their execution periods do not overlap at all, but for example, at least the start timing and The execution period may be made different by making any one of the end timings different from the end timing.

Furthermore, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, the hold display notice preparation performance (first performance mode), which has a lower level of expectation than the hold display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), can be executed simultaneously with the timer preparation display. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined rate even if the hold display notice preparation performance (first performance mode) is not as strong as the hold display notice preparation performance (second performance mode). It may be configured not to be executed at the same time as the performance. Further, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the performance mode of the pending display preview preparation performance is a first performance mode with lower expectations than the second performance mode, and the performance mode of the timer preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectations than the second performance mode. They may be executed at the same time only in the production mode.

Furthermore, for example, if multiple preparatory effects are executed simultaneously (or if multiple preparatory effects are simultaneously executed in a second presentation mode with high expectations), a jackpot may be determined. .

Furthermore, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once is shown, but a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and active display) changes multiple times is provided. If the pending memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with higher expectations), the suspended memory display (or active display) An effect that suggests that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the retained memory display (or active display) and hits the retained memory display (or active display), the display will change. , a performance that does not change unless it is stabbed (such as a special performance that is performed only when the suspended memory display (or active display) is in a display mode other than the normal display mode) may be executed more frequently. , or conversely, it may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a process for executing the chance notice effect will be explained. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance notice setting process. The chance preview setting process is executed as a part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) that the performance control CPU 120 executes in the performance control process process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the chance preview setting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the chance preview performance flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance preview performance flag is set, it is determined whether the chance preview performance can be executed using the chance preview performance determination table (step 092 IWS202).

FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a chance notice. As shown in Figure 12-10, if neither the pending display preview preparation performance nor the timer preparation performance is being executed, 100% of the time it is "executable" (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is not executed). It is decided that the In addition, if either the pending display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is being executed in the second performance mode, 20% of the time the performance is "executable" (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is permitted). At a rate of 80%, it is determined that the execution is not allowed (that is, the execution of the chance preview performance is not permitted). In addition, if either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the first effect mode (and neither is being executed in the second effect mode), the percentage is 100%. In this case, it is determined that the execution is not allowed (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is not permitted).

If execution of the chance eye preview performance is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the stop pattern of the decorative symbols is determined to be the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols that is "123") (step 092IWS204). In addition, before step 092IWS204, if the stop symbol of the decorative pattern has already been determined, the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is changed to the chance pattern.

Next, the performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the chance preview performance will be described. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the chance preview performance.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2), the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and the lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a is displayed near the pending memory display. Occasionally, execution of the chance eye preview effect may be permitted, and if execution is permitted, the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols that is "123") is used as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) and the chance preview performance are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (B1) and (B2), the hold display preview preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped effect image 092IW004b of small and large size is displayed near the hold memory display. When there is a chance eye preview performance, execution is not permitted, so a stop symbol of a decorative pattern different from the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is displayed. That is, the pending display preview preparation performance (first performance mode) and the chance preview performance are not executed at the same time.

In this feature part 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion performance, it is possible to execute a chance notice performance separately from the pending display notice notice performance and the timer performance, and this chance notice notice performance is a preparatory performance called the pending display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). Further, as described above, the expectation of a jackpot is lower in the chance preview performance than in the hold display preview performance or the timer performance. Therefore, when the preparation performance is being executed (that is, before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed and the expectation level is unknown), the chance preview performance with low expectation of becoming a jackpot is executed. This may reduce the performance effect of the preparation performance. Furthermore, the suggested level of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, this feature section 092IW is configured so that the opportunity preview performance is more likely to be executed when the pending display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is not being executed ( For example, see Figure 12-10). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in this feature section 092IW, a chance notice is given when the preparatory performance for the first performance mode is executed and when the preparatory performance for the second performance mode, which has a higher expectation level than the first performance mode, is executed. They are configured to differ in the ease with which they can be performed. Specifically, the chance preview performance is more effective when the hold display preview preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first production mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see Figure 12-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain interest while ensuring an opportunity to execute the chance preview performance.

As explained above, in this feature section 092IW, an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) Advantageous suggestion performance execution means that can execute the advantageous suggestion performance, and preparation performance that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.). The advantageous suggestion presentation includes a first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation) and a second advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) that is different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation. The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. The first advantageous suggestion presentation and the second advantageous suggestion presentation can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation presentation and the second preparation presentation are executed at the same time. (For example, the pending display preview preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time. See FIG. 12-7(D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, this feature section 092IW is capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Suggestion performance execution means, and preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. The advantageous suggestion presentation includes a first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation), a second advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation, and the first advantageous suggestion presentation. The preparation performance includes a suggestion performance and a third advantageous suggestion performance different from the second advantageous suggestion performance (for example, a chance notice performance), and the preparation performance is a first preparation performance that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) and a second preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, a third advantageous suggestion performance, and a first preparation performance. and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is being executed. The third advantageous suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, this feature section 092IW is capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Suggestion performance execution means, and preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. The advantageous suggestion performance includes a plurality of types of first advantageous suggestion performances with different expectations (for example, a pending display preview performance with different expectations depending on the performance mode), and a second advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance. The first advantageous suggestion presentation includes a predetermined first advantageous suggestion presentation and a special first advantageous suggestion presentation whose expectation level is higher than the predetermined first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation). For example, the preparation performance includes a hold display preview performance in the first performance mode (blue) and a hold display preview performance in the third performance mode (red), and the preparation performance foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed. The first preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) and a second preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and the first preparation performance includes: The production modes include a first production mode and a second production mode in which the special first advantageous suggestion production is easier to execute than the first production mode (for example, the first production mode (small effect) and the second production mode. (Large effect), and when the hold display preview preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed, the hold display preview effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the third effect mode ( The pending display preview performance of (red) is likely to be executed (see Figure 12-3 (B)), when the first preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, and when the first preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed. (For example, the timer preparation effect is executed simultaneously when the hold display preview preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the execution rate of the second preparation effect differs depending on when the second preparation effect is executed. When the two presentation modes (large effect) of the pending display preview preparation presentation are being executed, they are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 12-7). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, this feature section 092IW is capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Suggestion performance execution means, and preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. The advantageous suggestion performance includes a plurality of types of first advantageous suggestion performances with different expectations (for example, a pending display preview performance with different expectations depending on the performance mode), and a second advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance. The first advantageous suggestion presentation includes a suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) and a third advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a chance notice presentation) that is different from the first advantageous suggestion presentation and the second advantageous suggestion presentation, and the first advantageous suggestion presentation is Includes a predetermined first advantageous suggestion presentation and a special first advantageous suggestion presentation that has a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first advantageous suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation of the first presentation mode (blue) and a third presentation) The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (e.g., a suspension display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second advantageous suggestion performance. It includes a second preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the performance will be executed, and the third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period. (See FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the first preparation performance is a performance mode in which the first production mode and the special first advantageous suggestion performance are more likely to be executed than the first production mode. There is a second presentation mode (for example, there is a first presentation mode (small effect) and a second presentation mode (large effect), and when the hold display preview preparation presentation of the second presentation mode (large effect) is executed. , the hold display preview effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the hold display notice effect of the third effect mode (red color) is likely to be executed (see Figure 12-3 (B)), The execution rate of the third advantageous suggestion performance is different when the first preparation performance is executed and when the first preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed (for example, the chance preview performance is a pending display notice). When the preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode (large effect), execution is more likely to be permitted than when it is executed in the first performance mode (small effect) (see FIG. 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature part 092IW, the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are executed for different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) is completed, the timer preparation performance is is executed (see Figure 12-7(D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in the present feature section 092IW, the first advantageous suggestion performance includes multiple types of performance modes (for example, a first performance mode (blue), a second performance mode (green), a third performance mode (red), etc.). -3 (A))), and the first preparation performance is performed in multiple types of performance modes (for example, the first performance mode (small effect), the second production mode (large effect), etc.). 12-3 (B)), and the production mode of the executable first advantageous suggestion production differs depending on which production mode of the first preparation production is executed (for example, , when the hold display preview preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display preview effect is executed according to any one of the first to third effect modes, and the hold display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. is executed, a pending display preview effect is executed according to one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature section 092IW, advantageous suggestion performance can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation performance (for example, when it is decided to execute a pending display notice notice performance or a timer performance, a pending display notice preparation performance may be executed). (See Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), the ease with which a timer preparation effect is executed depends on whether or not an incompatible preparation effect has been executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 12-3, if the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance. Also, as shown in Figure 12-4, As shown, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Then, when the hold display notice preparation effect, which does not correspond to the timer effect, is executed, it is easier to decide to execute the timer effect. (The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the display preview preparation effect is not executed.) Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature part 092IW, depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed, the ratio of which effect type of advantageous suggestion effect is executed differs (for example, the effect of a pending display notice effect or a timer preparation effect). When the mode is determined to be the second presentation mode, the proportion of decisions to execute the pending display notice preparation presentation or the timer preparation presentation is higher than when the mode is determined to be the first presentation mode.Figure 12-3 (B) , see Figure 12-4(B)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configurations shown in other feature sections such as the feature section 153SG to configure a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect shown in the feature section 092IW suggests that there will be a jackpot as shown in the feature section 153SG, and also indicates that the timer effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display will be executed. The timer performance can be a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot or a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display during the reach performance. It may be configured as follows.

1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Production control board 100... Microcomputer for game control 120... CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect that causes the predetermined light emitting means to emit light from the variable display executed before the variable display of the target to the variable display of the target based on the determination result of the determination means. And ,
Advantageous suggestion performance execution means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion performance that suggests that the control is in the advantageous state;
Preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance that foretells that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed ;
The predetermined suggestion performance execution means includes:
performing a process of turning off the predetermined light emitting means in the variable display of the target for which the determining means has determined not to perform the predetermined suggestion effect;
performing a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light in the variable display of the target for which the determining means has determined to execute the predetermined suggestion effect;
The advantageous suggestion performance includes a first advantageous suggestion performance, a second advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance, and a third advantageous suggestion performance different from the first advantageous suggestion performance and the second advantageous suggestion performance. and,
The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance that foretells that the first advantageous suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second advantageous suggestion performance will be executed,
The third advantageous suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel and independently from each other during the same period,
The third advantageous effect is better when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. Suggestive performances are more likely to be carried out,
The first preparation performance includes a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first performance mode and has a higher expectation level,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode, the first preparation performance is executed in parallel with the third advantageous suggestion performance, rather than when the first preparation performance is executed in the first performance mode. A high percentage of
The third advantageous suggestion performance has a lower degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first advantageous suggestion performance and the second advantageous suggestion performance.
A gaming machine characterized by: